Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW X5 2018-2025
Vehicle cockpit
CONTROLS
Vehicle cockpit
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Vehicle equipment
For further information:
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Around the steering wheel
1
Safety switch for windows and
To unlock
To lock
2
5
Seat comfort functions
3
4
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle cockpit
CONTROLS
Front passenger seat functionality
Displaying the menu bar in the in-
Volume, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
6
7
Opening and closing luggage
compartment 87
Selecting the menu contents in
To change the station/music
track, see the Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
Steering column lever, left
Telephone, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, Communication 6
High-beam headlight, headlight
flasher 151
Knurled wheel for selecting con-
figuration menus for instrument
Operating the infotainment selec-
tion lists in the instrument cluster
8
9
Shift paddles
Buttons on steering wheel, left
Switch Cruise Control Systems
12 Steering column lever, right
on/off 235
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
13
Horn, entire area
11 Buttons on steering wheel, right
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle cockpit
CONTROLS
14
16 Lights
17
To unlock the bonnet 390
Around the centre console
1
Ventilation 308
2
3
Hazard warning lights 412
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
Adjusting the volume
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle cockpit
CONTROLS
Station/track forward
Station/track back
ECO PRO drive mode
4
5
6
9
Switching drive-ready state on/off
10
Automatic Start/Stop function
7
8
SPORT drive mode
COMFORT drive mode
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Sensors in the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
Cameras
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Front camera
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Overview
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Camera behind the windscreen
Camera behind the windscreen.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Reversing Assist Camera.
Front radar sensor.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
The camera behind the windscreen is located
in the area of the interior mirror.
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Sensors in the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,
for example by a fogged up windscreen or
stickers.
Exterior mirror cameras
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
With the exterior mirrors folded in.
With open doors or open luggage compart-
ment.
▷
In the case of bright oncoming light or
strong reflections, for example if the sun is
low in the sky.
An exterior mirror camera is located under
each exterior mirror housing.
▷
▷
In the dark.
The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
Reversing Assist Camera
▷
During the camera calibration process im-
mediately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
WARNING
The Reversing Assist Camera is located in the
handle strip on the rear.
Due to external influences, e.g. interference,
the radar sensors of the vehicle and thus also
the driving assistance systems can be distur-
bed. There is a risk of accident. Observe the
traffic situation, be ready to take over steer-
ing and braking at any time, and actively in-
tervene if the situation warrants it.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.
For further information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, see page 422.
Vehicle care, see page 423.
System limits of the cameras
The function of the cameras can be restricted
or may indicate something wrong, for example
in the following situations:
▷
▷
In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
On steep crests or dips or on tight bends.
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Sensors in the vehicle
CONTROLS
Front radar sensor
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
For further information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, see page 422.
Vehicle care, see page 423.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors can be re-
stricted or not available, for example in the
following situations:
The front radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are contaminated.
In case of iced up sensors.
Side radar sensors, front
If the sensors are obscured, for example by
stickers, foils or a number plate carrier.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are misaligned, for example
due to parking damage.
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, for example by protruding loads.
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, for example by garage walls, hedges,
snow hills, vehicles or trailers.
The radar sensors are located on the side of
the front bumper.
▷
▷
After work performed incorrectly on the ve-
hicle paintwork near to the sensors.
At steep crests or hollows of hills.
Side radar sensors, rear
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Sensors in the vehicle
CONTROLS
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
Ultrasonic sensors, front
For further information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, see page 422.
Vehicle care, see page 423.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The physical limits of ultrasound measurement
may be reached when detecting objects in sit-
uations involving the following, for example:
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g. by
stickers.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
If the sensors are misaligned, for example
due to parking damage.
After work performed incorrectly on the ve-
hicle paintwork near to the sensors.
▷
▷
Small children and animals.
Persons wearing certain types of clothing,
for example a jacket.
▷
▷
Obstacles and people at the edge of the
driving lane.
If there is external interference with the ul-
trasonic sound, for example by passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
Side ultrasonic sensors
▷
▷
Certain weather conditions; for example,
high air humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat or strong wind.
For trailer towbars and tow hitches of other
vehicles.
▷
▷
▷
Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
Moving objects.
Higher protruding objects, for example pro-
jecting walls.
▷
Objects with corners, edges and smooth
surfaces.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the side in the
front and rear bumpers.
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Sensors in the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
For objects with fine surfaces or structures,
e.g. wire mesh fences.
▷
▷
▷
Objects with porous surfaces.
Small and low objects such as boxes.
Low objects already displayed, for exam-
ple, kerbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷
Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam
material.
▷
▷
▷
Plants or shrubs.
In washing bays and car washes.
In the event of bumps, for example speed
bumps.
▷
▷
In the presence of dense exhaust fumes.
The ultrasonic sensors do not take into ac-
count loads projecting beyond the outline of
the vehicle.
▷
If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor-
rectly seated.
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle operating condition
CONTROLS
Vehicle operating condition
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
Vehicle equipment
▷
▷
Apply the parking brake.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
on uphill or downhill gradient.
▷
Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
WARNING
General
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷
▷
▷
Rest state.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Standby state.
Drive-ready state.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
Rest state
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
Principle
If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off.
General
Establishing the rest state
automatically
The rest state is established automatically, for
example in the following situations:
The vehicle is in rest state before you open it
from outside and once you have left the vehicle
and locked it.
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
After a few minutes, if no operation is per-
formed on the vehicle.
WARNING
When the vehicle battery state of charge is
low.
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
Depending on the iDrive setting: one or
both of the front doors is opened when
leaving the vehicle after a journey.
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle operating condition
CONTROLS
In some situations, for example during a tele-
phone call or when the low-beam headlight is
switched on, the vehicle will not switch auto-
matically to rest state.
Establishing rest state on opening
the front doors
After a trip, the rest state can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
Press the button on the luggage compartment
to access the vehicle in deep sleep mode.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Deactivating deep sleep mode
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
▷
Switch off the function on the control dis-
play.
5. "Turn off after opening door"
▷
Drive the vehicle.
Establishing the rest state manually
To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end
of the journey:
Standby state
Principle
Press and hold the button on
the radio until the OFF display
on the instrument cluster turns
off.
When standby state is activated, most func-
tions can be operated while the vehicle is still
stationary. Any desired settings can be per-
formed.
General
Deep sleep mode
The vehicle switches to standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
Principle
Use the deep sleep mode to prevent discharg-
ing of the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not
used for a period of several weeks.
Manually establishing standby state
General
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are
reduced to the essentials.
The standby state can be switched on again
after the rest state has been automatically es-
tablished.
Activating deep sleep mode
1.
Apps menu
With button on the radio
2. "Vehicle apps"
Press the button on the radio.
The control display and instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
3. "System settings"
4. "Deep sleep mode"
5. Select the desired setting.
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle operating condition
CONTROLS
With the Start/Stop button
WARNING
Press the Start/Stop button. The
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
control display and instrument
cluster illuminate.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
Display in the instrument cluster
▷
▷
Apply the parking brake.
OFF is shown in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
on uphill or downhill gradient.
▷
Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
Drive-ready state
NOTICE
Principle
Repeated attempts to start the engine or
starting it several times in quick succession
can cause the starter to overheat. Fuel will
also be unburned or insufficiently burned,
which could cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. There is a risk of material damage.
Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General
Some functions can only be operated when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Safety information
Switching on drive-ready state
General
DANGER
Drive-ready state is switched on
using the Start/Stop button.
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-
tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to
enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain
pollutants which are colourless and odour-
less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can
also build up outside the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe clear
and ensure sufficient ventilation.
Switching on drive-ready state
1. Press the brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Starting proceeds automatically for a short
time and stops as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in
the instrument cluster illuminate for varying
lengths of time.
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Vehicle operating condition
CONTROLS
Petrol engine
Depending on the motorisation, full drive
power may not be available until approx.
30 seconds after the engine is started. In this
case, the vehicle will not accelerate in the usual
way.
For further information:
Diesel engine
With the engine cold and at temperatures be-
low 0 ℃, 32 ℉ the starting operation can be
delayed slightly due to automatic preheating.
A Check Control message is shown.
After the engine is started, full drive power may
not be available until the engine is at operating
temperature. Pay attention to the engine tem-
perature display and power display as applica-
ble. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate
in the usual way.
For further information:
▷
▷
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
Switching off drive-ready state
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage se-
lector lever position P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
changes to standby state.
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
Safety information
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
WARNING
Operating integrated information systems
and communication devices during a journey
may distract you from the traffic situation.
You could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only operate the systems
or devices if the traffic situation allows you to
do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-
tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand-
still.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Display and operating
concept
Main menu
Principle
General
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
The main menu is divided into different areas:
Overview
General
Depending on the equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.
Via the Controller.
Via the touchpad.
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Via gesture control.
Using the operating elements on the steer-
ing wheel.
1
Menu bar
2
3
4
Widgets
For further information:
Status information
Menu bar
Apps menu
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
filter can be selected. The last selected filter
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
is stored. If necessary, change the filter to see
the apps you want.
as buttons and allow jumping to the relevant
menu.
▷
▷
▷
"All apps": all apps and functions are dis-
played.
Status information
"Infotainment apps": only infotainment
apps are displayed.
General
The status field is located in the top area of the
control display. Status information is displayed
in the form of icons. Various symbols are avail-
able depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version.
"Vehicle apps": only functions for vehicle
setting are displayed.
Media menu
Access to functions of the entertainment
system, for example, radio stations or connec-
tion with external devices.
Telephone status information
Icon
Meaning
Communication menu
Active call.
Access to the telephone and message
function as well as the connection and man-
agement of mobile devices, for example,
smartphones.
Data transfer not possible.
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
Navigation menu
Access to navigation system, destination
entry and traffic information. Configurable map
views as well as other functions, for example
points of interest.
Entertainment status information
Icon Meaning
USB audio.
Apple CarPlay© menu
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
Connected Music with Spotify.
WiFi.
Depending on the national-market version
with connected function: access to Apple Car-
Play. Apple CarPlay allows certain functions of
a compatible Apple iPhone to be used securely
via iDrive.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Android Auto© menu
Depending on the national-market version
with connected function: access to Android
Auto. Android Auto enables certain functions
of a compatible Android smartphone to be
used securely via iDrive.
Status information notifications
Icon Meaning
Number of messages.
Check Control message.
Traffic information.
Widgets
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content, for example the map of the
navigation system. The widgets also serve
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Icon Meaning
Icon
Function
Suppress private information.
To confirm your digit input.
Do not disturb.
Notification.
Move the entry area to the left
or right.
Input comparison
For further information:
When entering data from a database, for ex-
ample contacts, the selection is gradually nar-
rowed down with each character entered and
supplemented if necessary.
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication, see page 6.
Other status information
Activating/deactivating functions
Icon Meaning
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
the function.
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Route guidance active.
Call up quicklist.
Icon
Meaning
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Activating/deactivating audio
confirmation
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound activated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Park Distance Control: sound deactiva-
ted.
3. "System settings"
4. "Sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
Digit input and display
Quick access
Letters and numbers
The quicklist provides access to the shortcuts,
certain settings and app recommendations.
Letters and numbers can be entered using
the controller, the touchpad, control display or
voice control depending on the equipment.
Icon
Function
To switch between upper and
lower case.
To enter a space.
To switch between languages.
To use voice input.
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Performing a function
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Digit in-
put
Operation
Show
quicklist.
Swipe from top to bottom on the
control display.
2. Tap the desired shortcut.
The function is carried out immediately. If you
have selected a phone number for example,
the connection will also be established.
Slide the Controller upwards.
Tap the
bar.
icon in the status
Hide
quicklist.
Swipe from the bottom up on the
control display.
Deleting shortcuts
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Slide the Controller downwards.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"
Activating/deactivating pop-ups
Pop-ups are automatically shown on the con-
trol display for some functions. Some of these
pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
Direct access
1.
Apps menu
General
2. "Vehicle apps"
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to
access menus for the respective function di-
rectly on the control display. Then continue the
operation via iDrive.
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
Overview
Shortcuts
General
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for example,
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Saving a function
1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Button Function
Call up the Exterior lighting menu.
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Safety information
BMW Curved Display
WARNING
Principle
Objects located in front of the control display
may slip and damage the control display.
There is a danger of injury or material dam-
age. Do not place objects in front of the con-
trol display.
The BMW Curved Display is the one-piece dis-
play in the vehicle that is curved towards the
driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises the
instrument cluster on the driver's side and the
control display in the centre console.
General
Overview
Follow the instructions on cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
For further information:
Care of special parts, see page 425.
Overview
Control display
Switching the control display on/off
automatically
The control display is switched on automati-
cally when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon
as the control display is required for operation.
1
2
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for example if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Control display
Switching the control display on/off
manually
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Principle
The iDrive functions are shown on the control
display.
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Adjusting the brightness
Buttons on the Controller
1.
Apps menu
Button Function
2. "Vehicle apps"
To go to the main menu.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Confirm the desired setting.
To go to the Media/Radio menu.
To go to the Telephone menu.
To go to the navigation map.
Depending on the lighting conditions, the
brightness control may not be immediately ap-
parent.
System limits
If the control display is exposed to very high
temperatures, for example because of strong
sunlight, the brightness may be reduced and
the control display may even switch itself off.
Normal functions will be restored when the
temperature is reduced, for example by provid-
ing shade or using the air conditioning.
To go to the destination entry menu
of the navigation system.
Go to previous menu.
To go to the Options menu.
Controller
General
Operation
The buttons are used to go to menus directly.
▷
Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
ample.
Overview
▷
Press to select a menu item, for example.
Controller
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Switching between menus
After selecting a menu item, a new menu is
displayed.
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
▷
Press the button.
▷
Slide in four directions to change between
menus, for example.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Entering letters and numbers
Digit input
1. Turn the Controller: to select letters or num-
bers.
2.
: to confirm your digit input.
Delete the input.
Operation using the
Controller
Icon Function
Press Controller: to delete a letter or
number.
Going to the main menu
Press and hold the Controller: to delete
all letters or numbers.
Press the key.
The main menu is displayed.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which entries exist can be
displayed in a letter field.
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or
right.
2. Press the Controller.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Selecting widgets
1. In the main menu, slide the Controller to the
right.
The first entry for the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected.
3. Press the Controller.
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Using the map
The navigation system's map can be moved
using the touchpad.
Operation by touchpad
General
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue the operation using the touchpad.
Depending on the equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the touchpad
of the controller.
Function
Operation
To move the map.
Swipe in the appropri-
ate direction.
Selecting functions
1.
Apps menu
To display the
menu.
Tap once.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
5. Select the desired setting.
Entering letters and numbers
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
▷
Always enter associated characters, for ex-
ample accents or dots, so that the letter can
be clearly identified.
Operation via control display
▷
The input options depend on the set lan-
guage. You may need to enter special char-
acters using the Controller.
General
Depending on the equipment, the control dis-
play may be equipped with a touchscreen.
Entering special characters
It is possible to tap on menu items and widg-
ets. Touch the control display with your fingers.
Do not use any objects.
Function
Operation
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
ter. touchpad.
Going to the main menu
Tap the icon.
To enter a space. From the centre of the
touchpad, swipe to the
right.
The main menu is displayed.
To enter a hy-
phen.
At the top of the touch-
pad, swipe to the right.
To enter an un-
derscore.
At the bottom of the
touchpad, swipe to the
right.
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Adapting widgets
Entering letters and numbers
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu.
It is only possible to make adaptations with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Digit input
1. If necessary, tap the
display.
icon or control
1. If necessary,
tap the icon.
2. Enter the required letters and numbers.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
Delete the input.
▷
▷
▷
Tap the icon.
Icon Function
A new widget can be selected.
Tap the icon.
Tap icon: to delete a letter or number.
The widget is deleted.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
Press and hold the widget and drag to
the left or right.
The widget is moved to the desired po-
sition.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
Sorting apps
To sort the app icons again, press and hold
the desired icon and move it to the desired
location.
Function
Operation
To move the map. Swipe in the appropri-
ate direction.
To zoom in/out on Pinch together or move
Switching between menus
After selecting a menu item, a new menu is
displayed.
the map.
apart your fingers.
To display the
menu.
Tap once.
Swipe from left to right on the Control Display.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which entries exist can be
displayed in a letter field.
Go to context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
The menu consists of various areas, such as:
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
▷
"General help": call up the Integrated Own-
er's Handbook.
The first entry for the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Relevant ConnectedDrive Services via the
ConnectedDrive Store.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Principle
Activating voice input
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
control of various vehicle functions. The Per-
sonal Assistant simplifies the operation of the
vehicle by proactively suggesting and auto-
mating habits.
General
Voice input can be activated in various ways:
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
General
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on the national-market ver-
sion.
Say the activation word.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the
following voice control, depending on
where the activation word was spoken.
The system includes special microphones
on the driver's side and the passenger's
side.
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
Say commands at a normal volume.
Speaking directly into the microphone does
not improve speech recognition.
Commands and numbers should be spoken
fluently, with the usual emphasis and at a
normal volume and speed.
Microphone button on steering wheel
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
1.
Press the button briefly.
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General
Operating requirements
▷
A system language that is supported by the
Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Saying the activation word starts the Personal
Assistant. The Personal Assistant listens.
▷
Always say commands in the configured
system language.
Preset activation word
For the full range of functions, the following
functions should be activated, set or booked:
›Hello BMW‹: The preset activation word can
be activated and deactivated.
▷
▷
All settings under
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
BMW ID or a driver profile.
▷
▷
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Activation word"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Additional speech assistants"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. ""Hello BMW""
Personal activation word
Cancelling voice input
In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹
Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Press the Controller.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good detection.
›Hello‹: The addition is not necessary during
activation word and does not need to be spo-
ken.
Possible commands
General
1.
Apps menu
Commands can be used to give instructions
or ask questions where the Personal Assistant
provides support.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
For example, it is possible to call contacts,
navigate to an address, make settings or ask
questions about the vehicle function.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Activation word"
7. "Personal activation word"
8. "Set"
Most of the contents on the control display, for
example menu items and list entries, can be
said as commands.
9. "Start recording"
Help for voice control
Activation word from third-party providers
▷
›Voice commands‹: to have voice command
options read aloud.
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers offer digital voice
assistants, e.g. Siri or Amazon Alexa.
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
In order to use Siri, the smartphone must be
connected via Apple CarPlay.
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands
for voice control announced.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
connected smartphone in the vehicle.
Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
In addition to the BMW preset or personal acti-
vation word, the activation word of voice assis-
tants from connected third-party providers can
be used.
Sample commands
1.
Apps menu
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹
2. "Vehicle apps"
›Drive me to Heathrow airport‹
›Play a classical music station‹
3. "System settings"
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Is my tyre pressure still okay?‹
›Activate climate control‹
›Increase the ACC distance‹
›Sport mode‹
Example command: ›How do you disable the
front passenger airbag?‹
The Personal Assistant gives a response.
Where applicable, the section of the Integrated
Owner's Handbook is displayed on the control
display if the vehicle is at standstill.
Further example commands can be displayed
on the Control Display.
Settings
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Setting the system language
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Help"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Example commands"
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
Sample commands for the current context are
displayed in the widget of the BMW Intelligent
Personal Assistant.
5. Select the desired setting.
For further information:
Setting the response length
You can set the Personal Assistant to use the
standard dialogue or a short version. In case
of the short version, the announcements by
the Personal Assistant are played back in an
abbreviated version.
Menu items
Menu items can be called up directly via the
Personal Assistant. Speak the menu items
as they are displayed on the Control Display.
When speaking the menu items, the order of
the menus does not have to be observed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
1. Activate the voice input.
2. ›Media‹
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
3. ›Saved stations‹
The saved stations are displayed on the
control display.
Owner's Handbook by voice control
Saying during voice output
It is possible to ask simple questions about
the vehicle functions and about operating the
vehicle.
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Personal Assistant. The function can be deac-
tivated if the feedback is frequently cancelled
inadvertently, for example due to background
noise or conversations in the vehicle.
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides are not a substitute for the printed
or Integrated Owner's Handbook. The function
is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition function and
the quality of the feedback may vary.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
version. Online speech processing is not avail-
able in all languages.
6. "Speaking during voice output"
1.
Apps menu
Suggestions
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
General
4. "Voice control"
The Personal Assistant provides support with
individual suggestions.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"
Activating/deactivating suggestions
1.
Apps menu
Voice control from third-party
providers
2. "Vehicle apps"
Depending on the equipment, third-party voice
control can be activated by pressing and hold-
ing the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Adapting suggestions
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
The suggestions can be adapted, e.g. for
which category suggestions are made or
whether an audio signal is output.
5. "Long press"
1.
Apps menu
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Adjusting the volume
3. "System settings"
Turn the volume control button during the spo-
ken instructions until the desired volume is ob-
tained.
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.
The volume setting is retained even if you
change the volume of other audio sources.
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the function, data
is sent across an encrypted connection to a
service provider where it is delete stored. An
active ConnectedDrive contract is required for
online speech processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market
Using the voice control of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be operated via voice
input.
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
The voice control of the smartphone is acti-
vated.
Automating habits
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
General
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for example, the automatic opening of win-
dows at the same place. This involves creating
rules that can be activated and deactivated at
any time.
2. Press the
button on the steering
wheel to cancel the voice control of the
smartphone.
Activating/deactivating routines
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Principle
3. "Automate habits"
4. Select the desired setting.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on the equipment and national-mar-
ket version. Alexa is a digital assistant from
Amazon. Amazon Alexa Car Integration allows
Alexa to be used in the vehicle. Some Alexa
functions may only work to a restricted extent
in the vehicle to ensure they do not create a
safety risk when driving.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
This also applies to safety-relevant func-
tions and systems.
Operating requirements
▷
▷
Certain noises may be detected and could
cause problems. Keep doors and windows
closed.
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷
An active Amazon account exists.
Noises from the front passenger or other
passengers can impair the system. Avoid
background noise in the vehicle while you
are speaking.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle and, if applicable, in the My BMW
App.
▷
▷
Strong dialects may prevent speech recog-
nition from working properly.
To set it up, follow the instructions in the Ama-
zon Alexa app in the vehicle.
A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Amazon Alexa"
Once set up, Amazon Alexa can be used in the
vehicle as follows:
BMW gesture control
Say the activation word Alexa and the desired
command.
Principle
BMW gesture control enables some iDrive
functions to be operated simply by moving
your hands.
Information about the active function appears
on the control display. If the function is im-
paired, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi if nec-
essary.
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
Overview
Settings
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting.
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
made in the area of the centre console at the
height of the control display.
Performing gestures
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-
visible Class 1 laser.
▷
Perform the gestures under the interior mir-
ror and to the side of the steering wheel.
▷
▷
Perform the gestures clearly.
Activating/deactivating gesture
control
The gestures can also be performed from
the passenger's side.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Possible gestures
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move extended index finger forward and To accept phone call.
backward in the direction of the control
To select the highlighted en-
try of a list during voice input.
To confirm the pop-up.
display.
Swipe hand in front of the control display To reject phone call.
in the direction of the front passenger
seat.
To close the pop-up.
To end voice input.
Move extended index finger slowly in a
clockwise circle.
To increase the volume.
Gesture is detected after approximately
one circular movement.
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move the extended index finger slowly
counter-clockwise in a circle.
To reduce the volume.
Gesture is detected after approximately
one circular movement.
Depending on the
equipment:
Bring thumb and index finger together
and move the hand to the right or left.
Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-
cle view.
3D View: rotate camera view.
This gesture is only possible
with the vehicle at standstill.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left To skip back.
back and forth.
The previous music track is
played.
Move fist with thumb extended to right
left back and forth.
Skip function forwards.
The next music track is
played.
With the index and middle fingers exten- Perform individually assigna-
ded, point into the direction of the control ble gesture.
display.
Stretch out all five fingers, make a fist
and then stretch out all five fingers
again.
Perform individually assigna-
ble gesture.
▷
▷
▷
Route guidance to home address.
Mute/playback.
Control display on/off.
Assigning a gesture individually
General
Two gestures can be assigned individually and
can be set as a shortcut for certain functions,
for example:
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an
active BMW ID or a driver profile.
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
type to select depends on the mobile device
and the function you wish to use.
Setting a gesture shortcut
The desired function can be selected directly in
any menu and set as a shortcut.
General
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"
Detailed information on functions and connec-
tion types can be found in the following media
from the Owner's Handbook under the speci-
fied keyword:
3. Select the desired gesture.
Selecting the function
Some defined functions can be selected di-
rectly in the menu for gesture control.
▷
Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehi-
cle.
▷
Printed Owner’s Handbook for Navigation,
Communication, and Entertainment.
1.
Apps menu
The following information sources can also be
used:
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.
Driver’s Guide Web.
5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-
o-five fingers"
Safety information
6. Select the desired setting.
WARNING
System limits
Operating integrated information systems
and communication devices during a journey
may distract you from the traffic situation.
You could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only operate the systems
or devices if the traffic situation allows you to
do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-
tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand-
still.
Detection of gestures by the camera in the
headliner can be disrupted under the following
circumstances:
▷
▷
▷
The camera lens is covered.
There are objects on the interior mirror.
The camera lens is dirty; clean the camera
lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, see page 423.
▷
The gesture is performed outside the de-
tection range.
Overview
▷
▷
Wearing of gloves or jewellery.
Smoking in the interior.
The following list shows possible functions
and the appropriate connection types for them.
The range of functions depends on the vehicle
equipment and the mobile device.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Principle
The vehicle offers various types of connections
for using mobile devices. Which connection
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Function
Connection type
Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls using the hands-free
system.
Bluetooth.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Operating telephone functions via
iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: calling with Personal eSIM. Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
WiFi.
Keyword: vehicle WiFi.
Use Internet access via the personal WiFi via personal hotspot.
hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
Operate Apple CarPlay via iDrive and Bluetooth and WiFi.
by voice commands.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Operate Android Auto via iDrive and Bluetooth and WiFi.
by voice control.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
For further information:
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
Vehicle equipment
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Operating requirements
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.
For further information:
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
▷
▷
Mobile reception.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
A consent for the transmission of the corre-
sponding data was given in the Data Pro-
tection menu.
For further information:
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
Search for an upgrade
Operating requirements
The standby state must be turned on to search
for a Remote Software Upgrade.
General
BMW recommends carrying out the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Safety information
Manual search
WARNING
1.
Apps menu
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
sion information can be shown on the control
display while downloading and following suc-
cessful completion of the installation.
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No consent to download is required.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Via BMW app
Display in the vehicle:
If an upgrade is available, information about
the new software version is displayed in the
BMW app.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for example via an
existing Wi-Fi connection.
5.
▷
Display currently installed version:
"Installed version:"
The data can then be transferred from the mo-
bile device to the vehicle.
▷
Display new available version:
"Info on version"
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for example in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal
on the Internet:
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.
3. Establish the connection to the vehicle.
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
Installing the upgrade
General
▷
▷
iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
Android: connect Bluetooth® audio and
Wi-Fi.
▷
Installing the remote software upgrade may
cause software modifications not made by
the vehicle manufacturer to be deleted,
such as increases in performance.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Modifications to the on-board power supply
of the vehicle, for example to control units
that have not been made by the manufac-
turer of the vehicle, can cause the installa-
tion to malfunction.
For further information:
For information on connecting mobile devices
with the vehicle, see Owner’s Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
Release notes
The installation can take around 20 to
30 minutes.
General
Installation cannot be interrupted.
The release notes describe the updates inclu-
ded in the Remote Software Upgrade. The ver-
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The vehicle cannot be used during installa-
tion.
Install immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately
when all prerequisites have been met.
You may leave the vehicle during installa-
tion.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Prerequisites for the installation
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
▷
The outside temperature is above -10 ℃,
14 ℉.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked on level ground.
The hazard warning lights are switched off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Installing with timer
The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
At the end of the journey, a timer can be used
to install the upgrade automatically at a config-
ured time, for example, during the night. It may
make sense to install later to meet functional
requirements, such as a sufficiently cooled en-
gine.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
If the prerequisites are not met, for example
a sufficient vehicle battery charge state, the
upgrade will not be offered for installation.
1.
Apps menu
Look out for an offer to install, for example
after driving for a long period.
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
Preparing the vehicle
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
The installation starts automatically when:
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the
vehicle manufacturer, for example if the in-
stallation is terminated.
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
Close the glass sunroof.
Closing the luggage compartment
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, many of the functions are
temporarily unavailable, for example:
Remove devices that consume energy, for
example mobile phone.
▷
▷
Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
▷
▷
Hazard warning lights.
Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lights.
Remove the devices connected to the
socket for on-board diagnosis.
▷
▷
Side lights.
Horn.
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Alarm system.
Emergency call.
Window lifters.
Glass sunroof.
Fuel filler flap lock.
Operating the tailgate or boot lid.
The driver's door can be unlocked and locked
from outside with the integrated key.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Purchased services, e.g. Real Time Traffic In-
formation or Remote Services, are automati-
cally reactivated during your next drive.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact
an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Validity of Owner's Handbook
Vehicle production
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con-
tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are up
to date.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update, for example,
via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
the latest information.
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
Principle
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal
data such as saved radio stations. This per-
sonal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
For further information:
General
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
Data protection
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Saved radio stations.
Stored shortcuts.
Data transfer
Navigation, for example saved destina-
tions.
Principle
The vehicle offers various services which re-
quire data to be transferred to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
▷
▷
Phone book.
Online data, for example favourites, cook-
ies.
▷
▷
▷
Office data, for example voice memos.
Login accounts.
General
Data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. If data transfer has been deactivated
for a service, then that service cannot be used.
Digital keys.
It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete
data. The vehicle is also removed from the My
BMW App and the ConnectedDrive customer
portal so that remote functions can no longer
be used.
Settings
Data transfer can be configured individually in
various stages or for individual services.
1.
Apps menu
Operating requirements
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷
Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at
a standstill.
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting data
Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when
the vehicle is reset to its factory settings.
For further information:
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronised with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings avail-
able in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is
used to log in.
Resetting vehicle data
All individual settings can be reset to the
factory settings when drive-ready state is
switched off. Data can only be deleted with the
vehicle at a standstill. The vehicle key must be
in the vehicle.
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three
driver profiles.
Activation of a BMW ID or a driver profile can
already take place when unlocking. For this
purpose, the driver recognition via a vehicle
key or a digital key must be assigned to the
BMW ID or the driver profile.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle is in the
guest profile.
If synchronisation of settings has been activa-
ted for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal
settings are retained in the BMW Cloud.
Operating requirements
When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,
changed, deleted or edited, the vehicle must
move no faster than at walking speed.
BMW ID/driver profiles
The login in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronisation with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
Principle
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle
settings.
Welcome window
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisite:
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
General
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW
ID can be registered via the BMW app, in
the ConnectedDrive Portal or at the authorised
Service Partner.
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
file:
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.
If a vehicle is used by several people, each
person can create their own BMW ID or driver
profile in order to save their personal settings.
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
If a BMW ID or a driver profile is activated,
the settings stored therein are applied to the
vehicle.
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
4.
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
▷
▷
Scan the QR code shown in the display.
The BMW ID is copied from the BMW
app.
▷
A BMW ID or a driver profile has not been
assigned to the vehicle key or the digital
key :
Enter the login data of the BMW ID.
5. Depending on the national-market version,
the following settings can be selected:
The welcome is personalised, the stored
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
driver profile can be changed.
▷
"Synchronise BMW ID"
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud
are applied.
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
or the control display is tapped outside of the
welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
▷
"Transfer settings"
If the vehicle is using the guest profile,
the settings of the guest profile will be
applied.
Registering a BMW ID
The following steps must be carried out in or-
der to use a BMW ID:
▷
"Continue"
The vehicle is added to the user’s BMW app.
▷
▷
▷
Register the BMW ID.
Activate the BMW ID.
Confirming the BMW ID
If the BMW ID has been created by the Service
Partner and added to the vehicle, the BMW ID
must then be confirmed in the vehicle:
Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.
Registration of the BMW ID via the BMW app
can be started in the vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Select the desired confirmation:
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. "Register now"
▷
Scan the displayed QR code with the
BMW app.
4. Scan the QR code shown in the display.
The BMW ID is created on the smartphone.
▷
Enter the password of the BMW ID.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered
by the authorised Service Partner and added
to the vehicle. The BMW ID must then be
confirmed on the control display of the corre-
sponding vehicle.
BMW app
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the BMW
app. This means that functions of the BMW
app can be used for this vehicle. This requires
the BMW app to be used with the same BMW
ID.
Adding the BMW ID
An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi-
cle:
Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the
BMW app by the authorised Service Partner. In
this case, the BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display of the corresponding ve-
hicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
In rare cases, the use of BMW app functions
for this vehicle may be restricted. A further
note is shown on the control display.
3.
▷
▷
"Log in with My BMW App"
"Log in with BMW ID"
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The PIN can be used to activate the BMW
ID or the driver profile, even if the assigned
vehicle key or the assigned digital key is not
available.
Creating a driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add driver profile"
▷
▷
"Vehicle key"
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
4. Select the desired setting:
"Transfer settings"
The vehicle key that is recognised in the
vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile.
If the vehicle is using the guest profile, the
settings of the guest profile will be applied.
"Digital Key"
The digital key that is recognised in the ve-
hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
the driver profile.
Main user
The main user is the person who first enters
their BMW ID into the vehicle and the vehicle
into the BMW app. Alternatively, the main user
can be defined by the Service Partner.
Automatic driver recognition
If driver recognition has been defined, auto-
matic activation of the BMW ID or driver profile
is triggered by the following activities:
The main user has access to the following set-
tings, for example:
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the assigned
vehicle key button.
▷
▷
Remove BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.
Transfer the role of the main user to an-
other BMW ID.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using an outside
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned digital key must be carried.
▷
▷
Make vehicle-wide privacy settings.
Creation of the digital master key.
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned digital key must be carried. De-
pending on the national-market version, it
may not be possible to recognise the digital
key.
For further information:
Specify the driver detection
A driver detection and a PIN can be set up for
a BMW ID or a driver profile.
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, the activation of
the BMW ID or the driver profile takes place
according to the following priority:
The driver detection offers the following ad-
vantages:
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
the assigned driver profile.
▷
The BMW ID or the driver profile with the
saved settings is automatically activated.
▷
The settings are not accessible to other
persons.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
The driver detection is specified immediately
following the addition of the BMW ID or after
creating the driver profile.
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are detec-
ted at the same time, the digital key trig-
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a
PIN must be created.
▷
"Set PIN"
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID
or the assigned driver profile.
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
at any time via iDrive:
▷
If another key is detected on the driver's
door after activating the BMW ID or the
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
file of the last key detected is activated.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
"Change driver profile"
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vated.
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
the stored settings are loaded.
Synchronisation of settings
If synchronisation is switched on, settings are
continuously synchronised from the following
areas, for example:
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated and
changed by anyone.
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g. profile picture.
Navigation, e.g. last destinations, home ad-
dress or map settings.
The guest profile is automatically active in the
following cases:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g. favourites or stored radio sta-
tions.
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
driver profile has not yet been created.
iDrive, e.g. main menu configuration, lan-
guage or units.
▷
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
Personal assistant, e.g. suggestions or acti-
vation word.
The following limitations apply to the guest
profile:
Exterior lights, e.g. one-touch signalling and
home lights.
▷
Selected functions that process personal
data are not available in the guest profile.
This includes functions of the navigation
and the saving of favourites. More infor-
mation on data processing is available in
the ConnectedDrive data protection notes /
service descriptions.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronised when you log in for the first time:
▷
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g. driver’s
seat position or temperature setting.
Privacy menu.
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
If it was not possible to recognise the BMW
ID or driver profile when unlocking the vehicle,
the BMW ID or driver profile is selected on the
welcome window.
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign a driver detection
to the guest profile.
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
sation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The guest profile is selected in the welcome
window or via iDrive:
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the
driver profile.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
For further information:
"Change driver profile"
3. "Continue as guest"
Settings
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
General
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-
ating a driver profile can be changed.
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
"Change driver profile"
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
3.
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
2. "Settings"
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
the vehicle to be removed from the BMW app.
If the BMW ID has been synchronised with the
BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud
is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the
currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest
profile is activated.
The following settings are available for the
BMW ID:
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
The synchronisation with the BMW Cloud.
The personal salutation.
Removing a vehicle from the BMW app re-
moves the corresponding BMW ID from the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronised with
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored on
the BMW Cloud will be retained.
The following settings are available for the
driver profile:
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
If the vehicle is removed from the main user’s
BMW app, it will also be removed from the
other users’ BMW apps. The corresponding
BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
The profile name.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures.
If the vehicle is reset to the factory settings, the
vehicle is removed from all users’ BMW apps
and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
Transfer of the vehicle key
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or
a driver profile can be used to view or change
the stored personal settings.
For a BMW ID, the personal profile picture can
be taken from the profile in the BMW app.
This requires that the synchronisation with the
BMW Cloud is activated in the settings. After
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
cancelled. Changes to the driver detection can
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Personal settings
CONTROLS
the profile picture from the BMW app has been
applied, a selection from the predefined pic-
tures is only possible if the profile picture in
the BMW app is deleted or synchronisation is
deactivated.
System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
the digital key may not always be possible, for
example in the following cases:
▷
If there is a change of driver without the
vehicle being locked and unlocked.
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked from the
BMW app.
The use of personal settings that are stored
for a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to
technical limitations. For example, there may
be stored settings for a system that is not
available in other vehicles, or only in an incom-
patible version.
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
teries out of reach of children. Immediately
seek medical help if there is any suspicion
that a battery or button cell has been swal-
lowed or is located in any part of the body.
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Overview
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Vehicle key
General
The delivery specification includes two vehicle
keys, each containing an integrated key.
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Icon
Meaning
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
Unlock.
Lock.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance re-
quirement, the service data is saved in the ve-
hicle key.
Open/close the luggage compart-
ment.
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked
in, take it with you whenever you leave the
vehicle.
Function adjustable:
Open/close the luggage compart-
ment.
Safety information
Additional vehicle keys
WARNING
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cells can be swallowed
and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two
hours, for example due to internal burns or
chemical burns. There is a danger of injury or
danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and bat-
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Loss of vehicle keys
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorised Service Partner or an-
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
If a BMW ID or driver profile has been assigned
to the lost vehicle key, the connection to this
vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key
can then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver
profile.
Replacing the battery
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-
cle key to the side.
NOTICE
Unsuitable batteries in a battery-operated
device can damage the device. There is a
risk of material damage. Always replace the
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-
ing.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the
positive terminal facing down.
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle
key.
Removing the integrated key
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.
Dispose of old batteries with an author-
ised Service Partner, another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop, or hand them in to an authorised collec-
tion point.
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open
side of the vehicle key.
Integrated key
General
The integrated key enables the vehicle to be
unlocked and locked without the vehicle key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key fits the glove compartment.
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Safety information
Unlocking/locking via the door lock
1. Pull the door handle outwards with one
hand and hold it.
WARNING
With some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside requires specific knowl-
edge.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life
if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
periods and are exposed to extreme temper-
atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
from the outside when there is someone in-
side it.
2. Slide one finger of your other hand under
the cover cap from behind and press the
cover outwards.
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Support the cover cap with your thumb to
stop it falling out of the door handle.
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
3. Remove the cover cap.
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the
vehicle key is not detected.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock with the
integrated key.
If this happens, proceed as follows:
1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against
the mark on the steering column. Pay at-
tention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2.
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within
10 seconds.
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:
The other doors must be unlocked using the
central locking system button or manually from
the inside.
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown where ap-
plicable.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem is triggered when the door is opened.
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
vehicle key in some circumstances, including
the following:
In this case, use the emergency detection of
the vehicle key to switch off the alarm.
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system is not acti-
vated.
Disruption of the radio link by transmis-
sion masts or other equipment transmitting
powerful signals.
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob-
jects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metallic objects.
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
Disruption of the radio link by mobile
phones or other electronic devices in the
immediate vicinity of the vehicle key.
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with electronic devices.
▷
▷
Interference with the radio transmission
caused by the charging process of mobile
devices, for example a mobile phone.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
The vehicle key is located in the immediate
vicinity of the wireless charging tray.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
Place the vehicle key somewhere else.
If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key. Use the emergency detection
of the vehicle key to turn on the drive-ready
state.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
Access to vehicle interior
Safety information
WARNING
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left
inside can lock the doors from the inside and
lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle
cannot be opened from the outside. There is
a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with
you so that you can open the vehicle from the
outside.
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
The following functions are also carried out:
▷
If a BMW ID or driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
WARNING
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on unless
they were switched off manually.
With some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside requires specific knowl-
edge.
Depending on the equipment, folded exte-
rior mirrors are folded out.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life
if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
periods and are exposed to extreme temper-
atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
from the outside when there is someone in-
side it.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using
the button inside the vehicle, they are not
folded out when the vehicle is unlocked.
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The anti-theft security system is switched
off.
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
have been unlocked because of the settings,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
The alarm system is switched off.
For further information:
The vehicle is operational after one of the front
doors is opened.
▷
▷
▷
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Actions during locking
Locking the vehicle
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
1. Close the driver's door.
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
2.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
On the outside door handle
Principle
▷
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
mirrors can be folded in automatically dur-
ing locking. If the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the exterior mirrors are not fol-
ded in.
This feature allows you to access the vehicle
without having to use the vehicle key.
▷
Home lights can be activated during lock-
ing.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
The following functions are carried out:
▷
All the doors, the tailgate and fuel filler flap
are locked.
General
▷
The anti-theft security system is switched
on. This prevents the doors from being un-
locked using the locking button or the door
openers.
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
vehicle can also be unlocked and locked at the
outside door handle with compatible smart-
phones with a digital key.
▷
The alarm system is switched on.
If drive-ready state is still switched on when
locking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. If this
happens, switch off drive-ready state using
Start/Stop button.
For further information:
Operating requirements
For further information:
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,
in your trouser pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to unlock and lock with the digital
key.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of
the doors.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Principle
The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap-
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle
key.
Unlocking the vehicle
If the driver moves away from the unlocked ve-
hicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked.
General
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone is an area with a radius of
approximately 1.50 m, 5 ft around the vehicle.
Fully grasp the handle of a front door.
The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
The locking zone is an area with a radius of
approximately 3 m, 9 ft around the vehicle.
2. Touch the grooved surface on the handle of
a closed front door with your finger for ap-
proximately 1 second, without gripping the
door handle.
Depending on the national-market version,
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital
key. Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to do this.
If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking
zone without moving for a prolonged period of
time, the vehicle is locked automatically.
If a person is detected on a seat when locking,
the following restrictions apply:
▷
The vehicle is locked, but not protected
against theft.
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Malfunction
For further information:
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the outside door han-
dles.
Actions during unlocking
If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle
with the buttons on the vehicle key or with the
integrated key.
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,
note the following:
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only
be unlocked when the driver approaches the
vehicle on the driver's side.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
For further information:
Operating requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,
in your trouser pocket.
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
Hold the activated Key Card directly and cen-
trally up against the outside door handle on
the driver's door.
▷
▷
Drive-ready state must be switched off.
If the vehicle has been in rest state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
is not possible until the vehicle has been
driven.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the luggage com-
partment are closed.
For further information:
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
process.
With the Key Card
With the BMW Digital Key
Principle
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which a digital
key is installed. The key card can be used to
unlock and lock the vehicle.
Depending on the national-market version and
equipment, a digital key can be installed on
a compatible smartphone and used to unlock
and lock the vehicle.
For further information:
For further information:
General
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di-
rectly and centrally up against the outside door
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
handle on the driver's door. The position of the
NFC antenna will depend on the smartphone
model.
Safety information
WARNING
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the luggage com-
partment are closed.
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of
injury. When opening and closing, make sure
that the movement range of the tailgate is
kept clear.
Frequently Asked Questions
What measures can be taken to enable a vehi-
cle to be opened if the vehicle key has acciden-
tally been locked inside the vehicle?
WARNING
▷
The Remote Services of the app can be
used to lock and unlock a vehicle, for exam-
ple.
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when opened. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. When opening and closing,
make sure that the movement range of the
tailgate is kept clear.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract and the app must be instal-
led on a smartphone.
▷
Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested
via the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre.
NOTICE
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract.
Foreign objects, for example sand or ice, be-
tween the bumper and the tailgate can cause
damage when operating the lower tailgate.
There is a risk of material damage. Before
operating the lower tailgate, remove any for-
eign objects from the bumper and the lower
tailgate.
Access to the luggage
compartment
General
The luggage compartment will be opened to
the configured opening height.
WARNING
Pointed or angular objects can strike the win-
dows and the heating elements during the
journey. There is a danger of injury or mate-
rial damage. Cover edges and make sure that
pointed objects cannot strike the windows.
The tailgate consists of the upper and lower
tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downwards
to make it easier to load the luggage compart-
ment.
The opened lower tailgate can be loaded with
up to 250 kg.
NOTICE
If the tailgate is operated manually in the
wrong order, the tailgate can be damaged.
There is a risk of material damage. Close
the lower tailgate before manually closing the
upper tailgate.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing the luggage compartment
With the vehicle key
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key until the upper tailgate
has closed.
General
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked
in, do not place it in the luggage compartment.
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key until the upper tailgate
has closed.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the following settings are pos-
sible:
The lower tailgate closes automatically with
the upper tailgate.
▷
Unlocking the luggage compartment with
the vehicle key also unlocks the doors.
Releasing the button stops the movement.
▷
The vehicle must be unlocked before un-
locking the luggage compartment with the
vehicle key.
If the doors were not unlocked, the luggage
compartment is locked again as soon as it
closes.
▷
▷
Only the upper tailgate or the upper and
lower tailgates together can be opened
with the vehicle key.
On the luggage compartment
General
The tailgate can be operated with
the button on the vehicle key.
With Comfort Access, the luggage compart-
ment can be accessed without activating the
vehicle key.
Operating requirements
To open the luggage compartment with the
vehicle key, the trailer socket must not be oc-
cupied.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
compatible smartphones with a digital key are
also detected automatically. In this case, the
luggage compartment can be opened with a
smartphone.
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the luggage compartment with the vehi-
cle key.
Opening with the vehicle key must be activated
in the settings.
For further information:
For further information:
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,
in your trouser pocket.
Opening the luggage compartment
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-
ond.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to detect the digital key.
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-
ond.
The lower tailgate is also opened if applicable.
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
the vehicle in the vicinity of the luggage
compartment.
Opening the upper tailgate
The lower tailgate closes automatically with
the upper tailgate.
Closing the lower tailgate
Make sure that there is no load on the lower
tailgate.
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the luggage compartment.
In the interior
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the lug-
gage compartment.
Functional prerequisites
In order to be able to open the luggage com-
partment with the button in the vehicle interior,
the trailer socket must not be occupied.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
Opening the lower tailgate
The upper tailgate must be open.
In order to be able to close the luggage com-
partment with the button in the interior, the
vehicle key or the digital key must be located in
the interior.
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
Opening the luggage compartment
Closing the upper tailgate
Press the button in the driver's door.
The lower tailgate is also opened if ap-
plicable.
Closing the luggage compartment
Press the button in the driver's door.
The lower tailgate closes automatically with
the upper tailgate.
▷
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
upper tailgate.
Cancelling the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
Press the button on the inside of the
upper tailgate.
The vehicle is locked after the lug-
gage compartment has been closed. For
this to happen, the driver's door must be
closed and the vehicle key must be outside
▷
▷
If the vehicle begins to move.
By pressing the button on the outside of
the luggage compartment. Pressing it again
closes the luggage compartment again.
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of
the luggage compartment. Pressing it again
closes the luggage compartment again.
General
The availability of the function depends on the
equipment and national-market version.
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range,
the luggage compartment may open or close
inadvertently if you unintentionally move your
foot or if a foot movement is detected.
Pressing the button again continues the
opening process.
Pressing and holding the button again
closes the luggage compartment again.
The sensor range extends to approximately
1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area.
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again resumes the
opening procedure.
If you open the luggage compartment contact-
lessly, locked doors will not be unlocked.
depending on the national-market version,
touchless opening of the luggage compart-
ment is also possible for compatible smart-
phones with a digital key.
Cancelling the closing operation
The closing operation is interrupted in the
following situations:
For further information:
▷
▷
When driving off suddenly.
By pressing the button on the outside of
the luggage compartment. Pressing it again
opens the luggage compartment again.
Safety information
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of
the luggage compartment. Pressing it again
opens the luggage compartment again.
WARNING
When opening/closing contactlessly, there is
a risk of touching vehicle parts, for example
the hot exhaust system. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure you are standing securely
as you move your foot, and do not touch the
vehicle.
By releasing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing the button again opens the lug-
gage compartment again.
Pressing and holding it again resumes the
closing operation.
▷
By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling and holding the button again re-
sumes the closing operation.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of
injury. When opening and closing, make sure
that the movement range of the tailgate is
kept clear.
Opening and closing the luggage
compartment contactlessly
Principle
Touchless opening and closing of the luggage
compartment is possible when carrying the ve-
hicle key on your person.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
movement in the central rear area and the lug-
gage compartment is opened and closed.
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Your leg must move across the ranges of
both sensors.
WARNING
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when opened. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. When opening and closing,
make sure that the movement range of the
tailgate is kept clear.
WARNING
Pointed or angular objects can strike the win-
dows and the heating elements during the
journey. There is a danger of injury or mate-
rial damage. Cover edges and make sure that
pointed objects cannot strike the windows.
Before the luggage compartment opens, the
hazard warning lights will flash.
Moving the foot again will stop the opening
procedure. The subsequent foot movement
will close the luggage compartment again.
Operating requirements
Closing the luggage compartment
Perform the foot movement for opening the
luggage compartment.
▷
▷
▷
▷
To enable the touchless opening of the lug-
gage compartment, the trailer socket must
not be occupied.
The hazard warning lights flash and an acous-
tic signal sounds.
Selector lever position P must be engaged
for touchless opening of the luggage com-
partment.
Moving the foot again will stop the closing op-
eration. The subsequent foot movement will
open the luggage compartment again.
Contactless opening and closing of the lug-
gage compartment must be activated in the
settings.
System limits
Detection of foot movement may be restricted
by the following external circumstances:
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to enable the touchless opening and
closing of the luggage compartment using
the digital key.
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
For further information:
Movement in the vicinity of the sensors may
cause the luggage compartment to open un-
intentionally, for example if water flows under-
neath the vehicle during cleaning or in heavy
rain. To prevent the luggage compartment
from opening unintentionally, make sure that
the vehicle key is far enough away from the
rear of the vehicle.
Opening the luggage compartment
1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap-
proximately an arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath
the vehicle and immediately pull it back.
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
registered digital keys.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical fault, operate the
unlocked luggage compartment manually with
a slow and smooth motion.
Operating requirements
To activate and deactivate the Key Card, there
must be a vehicle key in the vehicle.
Key Card
Activating the Key Card
Dock with thermal cup holder:
Principle
The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and
start the vehicle.
General
The availability of the Key Card depends on
the equipment and national-market version.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
Dock without thermal cup holder:
When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can
be used to start the vehicle when activated. Al-
ways take the vehicle key with you to a service
appointment.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card may be damaged. There is a risk of
material damage. Do not place the Key Card
in the wireless charging tray at the same time
as a mobile device.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the
smartphone tray.
3. Follow instructions on the control display.
Deactivating the Key Card
1.
Apps menu
Activating/deactivating the Key Card
in the vehicle
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
General
5. "Key Card"
If BMW Digital Key is enabled for the vehicle, a
digital key can be used instead of the vehicle
key.
6. "Deactivate Key Card"
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
registered digital keys.
BMW Digital Key
Principle
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compat-
ible smartphone to lock, unlock and start the
vehicle.
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
For further information:
General
The availability and scope of functions of BMW
Digital Key depend on the equipment and na-
tional-market version.
Switching on drive-ready state
Dock with thermal cup holder:
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compati-
ble smartphone or other compatible end devi-
ces.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compati-
ble smartphone, this function must be offered
by the smartphone manufacturer. It is possi-
ble to check in the My BMW App whether the
smartphone and the vehicle are compatible
and which functions are supported.
Dock without thermal cup holder:
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it
is helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card
in the vehicle. In situations where the vehicle
has to be handed over to another person, the
Key Card can be handed over instead of the
smartphone. For this, the Key Card must be
activated via iDrive.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
For further information:
2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle
of the smartphone tray.
▷
▷
▷
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
www.bmw.com/digitalkey
After turning on the drive-ready state, the Key
Card can be taken out of the storage tray.
Malfunction
Objects between the sensors and the Key
Card, for example a purse/wallet or smart-
phone case, may prevent the vehicle from de-
tecting the Key Card.
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Limiting the range of functions
Operating requirements
Certain functions of the digital key can be limi-
ted before handing it over. For example, re-
strictions on driving stability control systems
can be suppressed and engine performance
can be reduced before the digital key is given
to a beginner driver. Further information can
be found on the ConnectedDrive portal and in
the My BMW App.
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key.
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the registered keeper.
The smartphone battery is sufficiently
charged. The minimum battery charge re-
quired depends on the smartphone in
question.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient's smartphone
model, authentication may be required for se-
curity reasons.
Enabling the main digital key
The registered keeper's smartphone is ena-
bled as the main digital key in the vehicle.
To do so, the registered keeper must provide
proof of authorisation for their vehicle.
An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method can be used to perform the
authentication. Corresponding information is
displayed for your attention on the smartphone
or control display.
Proof of authorisation can be started via the
My BMW App or via the activation code in the
corresponding smartphone function, for exam-
ple, in the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must
be in the vehicle during activation.
Deleting digital keys
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
Key menu in the app or on the control display.
General
Deleted digital keys are removed from the list
of enabled digital keys.
Sharing digital keys
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
General
Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared
with other people. This option is provided via
the smartphone enabled as the main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
Deleting the digital master key
The digital master key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
The deletion of the digital master key is com-
pleted immediately.
Passing on authorisation
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for example in
the Wallet app.
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
phone associated with the digital main key, via
the smartphone associated with the key to be
deleted or via iDrive.
As soon as a digital key is shared with a per-
son, this person receives an invitation. If the in-
vitation is accepted, the digital key is activated
on the recipient's smartphone.
A shared key will only be deleted via the
smartphone associated with the main digital
key if the vehicle is being used with a key other
than the one that is to be deleted.
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Deletion via the smartphone associated with
the key to be deleted or via iDrive will take
place immediately.
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-
tion.
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
with the digital key.
Deletion in iDrive
To enable a digital key to be deleted via iDrive,
there must be an authorised vehicle key in the
vehicle or the digital main key must be in the
smartphone tray.
For further information:
Switching on drive-ready state
1.
Apps menu
Using the smartphone tray
2. "Vehicle apps"
Dock with thermal cup holder:
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. Select a digital key as necessary.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
Resetting the function
To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must
be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle.
All digital keys, including the main key, are de-
leted when the BMW Digital Key function is
reset. The digital key of the Key Card is not
deleted.
Dock without thermal cup holder:
Following the reset, it will no longer be possi-
ble to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a
digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again in
order to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the
smartphone tray.
5. "Reset function"
Make sure that the display is pointing up-
wards.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-
lows:
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
drive-ready state.
▷
▷
Via the outside door handle.
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-
tional-market version, the vehicle can be
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by an unsuitable smart-
phone cover.
In the interior
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending
on the national-market version, for the smart-
phone with activated Bluetooth to be located in
the interior. Press the Start/Stop button to turn
on the drive-ready state.
▷
▷
▷
There are objects between the smartphone
and its cover, for example a card with a chip
or the Key Card.
Fault of the connection from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
Selling the smartphone
Delete all digital keys from the smartphone
before selling it. This ensures that the smart-
phone can no longer be used for the vehicle.
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
Changing smartphones
Central locking buttons
In order to be able to use a new smartphone
as a digital main key, the new smartphone
must be activated in accordance with the de-
scription for the digital main key. The previous
main key is deleted when the new smartphone
is activated.
General
The vehicle is automatically locked when mov-
ing off.
If an accident of appropriate severity occurs,
the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The haz-
ard warning lights and the interior lights illumi-
nate.
Selling the vehicle
Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key
function or remove the vehicle from the Con-
nectedDrive account of the current registered
keeper.
Overview
If the vehicle is removed from the Connected-
Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle
are deleted. The digital key of the Key Card is
not deleted.
System limits
With a digital key, it is not possible to switch off
the interior movement sensor and the tilt alarm
sensor of the alarm system.
The central locking system buttons are located
on the front door.
For further information:
Locking the vehicle
Malfunction
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
digital key in some circumstances, including
the following:
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-
theft protection system.
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Unlocking the vehicle
Valet parking mode
Press the key.
Principle
The control display is disabled in valet parking
mode.
To open the door
This mode can be used, for example, if the ve-
hicle is to be handed over to a parking service.
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors together.
Pull the door handle above the arm-
General
rest.
Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
▷
Pull the door handle on the door being
opened. The other doors remain locked.
Valet parking mode includes the following re-
strictions:
Soft-close function for doors
▷
Changes to the vehicle settings via iDrive
are not possible.
Principle
▷
Settings stored in a BMW ID or a guest pro-
file cannot be changed.
The soft-close function reduces the effort and
noise when closing doors.
▷
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.
The door can be pushed into the door lock
without effort, and the door automatically
closes completely.
The volume of the audio system is limited.
The integrated universal remote control is
deactivated.
▷
▷
The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be
deactivated.
Safety information
The availability of certain settings of the
drive modes is restricted.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the doors are operated. There is a danger of
injury. When opening and closing, make sure
that the movement range of the doors is kept
clear.
For further information:
Operating requirements
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID.
Closing
To close, press the door gently.
Activating valet parking mode
1.
Apps menu
The closing process is automatic.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
5. If necessary, "PIN"
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-
signed PIN, create a PIN. The PIN is nee-
ded to deactivate the valet parking mode.
Touchless unlocking/locking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
6. If necessary, enter the PIN.
7. "Activate valet parking mode"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Comfort access"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deactivating valet parking mode
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen.
Automatic unlocking
1.
Apps menu
2.
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.
2. "Vehicle apps"
If the PIN was forgotten: enter access
data for the BMW ID.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter access data for
the BMW ID.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"
"Unlock doors when in P"
Settings
After drive-ready state has been switched off
by pressing the Start/Stop button or by engag-
ing the selector lever position P, the locked ve-
hicle is automatically unlocked.
General
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for opening and closing.
Automatic locking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Unlocking and locking
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Doors
1.
Apps menu
5. "Lock after a short time"
2. "Vehicle apps"
The vehicle is automatically locked again after
a short while if no doors are opened after un-
locking.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Unlock"
Vehicle acknowledgement signals
6. Select the desired setting:
1.
Apps menu
▷
"Driver's door only"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap
are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
"All doors"
▷
"Flash on lock/unlock"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Unlocking is acknowledged by two
flashes, locking by one flash.
Tailgate and doors
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, this setting may not be avail-
able.
▷
With alarm system:
"Sound on lock/unlock"
Unlocking is acknowledged by two
acoustic signals, locking by one acoustic
signal.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
Automatic folding of the mirrors
5. Select the desired button.
6. Select the desired setting:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷
"Upper tailgate"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
The upper tailgate is opened.
"Upper tailgate and door(s)"
▷
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"
The tailgate is opened and doors are
unlocked.
Luggage compartment
▷
▷
"Both tailgates"
Upper or both tailgates
For the button in the interior, it is possible to
set whether only the upper tailgate is opened
or the upper and lower tailgates together:
The upper and lower tailgates are
opened.
"Both tailgates and door(s)"
The upper and lower tailgates are
opened and the doors are unlocked.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
The following settings are available for
the button on the vehicle key:
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is already
unlocked"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Upper tailgate"
The vehicle must be unlocked before the
tailgate can be operated with the vehicle
key.
Only the upper tailgate is opened.
"Both tailgates"
▷
"Lock tailgate button"
The upper and lower tailgates are
opened together.
Operation of the tailgate with the vehicle
key is disabled.
In order to open the upper and lower
tailgates together, the upper tailgate
must still be closed when operating the
button.
Adjusting the opening height
The extent to which the upper tailgate opens
can be set.
This setting also applies to contactless
opening of the tailgate.
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
When setting the opening height, make sure
that there is a clearance of at least 10 cm, 4 in
above the tailgate.
▷
Opening a door, the bonnet or the luggage
compartment.
▷
▷
Movements inside the vehicle interior.
1.
Apps menu
A change in the vehicle's angle of inclina-
tion, for instance if an attempt is made to
jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it
prior to towing away.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
▷
▷
▷
An interruption in the battery voltage.
Improper use of the diagnostic socket.
5. "Opening height"
6. Watch the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the on-board diagnostic socket.
The alarm system indicates these changes vis-
ually and audibly:
Opening/closing the luggage
compartment contactlessly
▷
Acoustic alarm:
1.
Apps menu
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
▷
Optical alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning lights
and, if applicable, the headlights.
5. Select the desired setting.
To safeguard operation of the alarm system,
do not modify the system.
Closing the glass sunroof
automatically
1.
Apps menu
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is switched on or off as
soon as the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Close sunroof automatically"
If the vehicle is locked remotely from a dis-
tance with the My BMW App, the alarm system
is not switched on.
After locking, the open glass sunroof is auto-
matically moved to the raised position in the
event of rain or after six hours.
Opening the doors when the alarm
system is switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if it has been unlocked via the door
lock using the integrated key.
Alarm system
Principle
The alarm system visually and acoustically
signals when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle.
Opening the luggage compartment
with the alarm system turned on
The luggage compartment can be opened
even when the alarm system is turned on.
General
After closing the luggage compartment, the
luggage compartment will be locked and moni-
The alarm system responds to the following
changes in a locked vehicle:
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
tored again. The hazard warning lights flash
once during closing.
The alarm system responds, for example when
there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the
vehicle away.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
Interior movement detector
The vehicle interior is monitored.
The alarm system responds when movement
is detected in the vehicle interior.
To ensure perfect functioning, the windows
and glass sunroof must be closed.
Avoiding false warnings
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
General
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move-
ment detector may trigger an alarm even
though no unauthorised activity is taking place.
The indicator light flashes for approxi-
mately 10 seconds then switches to flash-
ing every 2 seconds:
Situations where false warnings may occur:
The interior movement detector and tilt
alarm sensor are not active because the
doors, bonnet or tailgate are not closed
correctly. Correctly closed access points are
secured.
▷
▷
▷
In washing bays or car washes.
In two-level garages.
When transporting the vehicle via motorail,
car ferry or trailer.
▷
▷
When there are pets in the vehicle.
Once the remaining open access points
have been closed, the interior movement
detector and tilt alarm sensor are switched
on.
When the vehicle is locked after starting to
refuel.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement
detector can be switched off for such situa-
tions.
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all
accesses have been closed:
Error in the alarm system.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior movement detector
The indicator light extinguishes after the
vehicle has been unlocked:
Within 10 seconds of locking the vehi-
cle, press the button on the vehicle key.
This means that the vehicle is not being
tampered with.
The indicator light illuminates for ap-
proximately 2 seconds and then flashes again.
▷
The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
for no longer than approximately 5 minutes:
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move-
ment detector are switched off until the next
time the vehicle is locked.
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's angle of inclination is monitored.
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, drive-ready state must then be turned on
via emergency detection of the vehicle key.
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-
rors are folded in provided that they were not
folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-
terior mirrors are not folded in.
Window
On the outside door handle
General
Principle
If a window is often opened in the same lo-
cation, this task can be carried out by the
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. Useful, for
example, if the same multi-storey car park is
frequently used.
The windows can be closed via the outside
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
For further information:
General
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
windows can also be closed at the outside
door handle with compatible smartphones with
digital key.
Safety information
WARNING
For further information:
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the windows are operated. There is a danger
of injury or material damage. When opening
and closing, make sure that the movement
range of the windows is kept clear.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,
in your trouser pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the windows with the digital
key.
With the vehicle key
Opening windows
Close windows
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after unlocking.
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key remains pressed.
Close windows
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after locking.
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key remains pressed.
Touch the grooved surface on the outside door
handle of a closed front door with your finger
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
and hold it there without gripping the door
handle.
The window is opened automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move-
ment.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof with sun protection are closed.
Close windows
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-
rors are folded in provided that they were not
folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-
terior mirrors are not folded in.
▷
Pull the switch as far as the resist-
ance point.
The window closes for as long as
the switch is held.
▷
Pull the switch past the resistance
point.
In the interior
The window closes automatically.
Pulling the switch again stops the move-
ment.
Overview
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
parts of the body from becoming trapped be-
tween the door frame and window while a win-
dow is being closed.
Window lifters
General
If resistance or an obstruction is detected while
a window is being closed, the closing process
is interrupted.
Operating requirements
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Safety information
Drive-ready state is switched on.
For a short while after rest state has been
established.
WARNING
Accessories on the windows, for example
aerials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism.
There is a danger of injury. Do not attach
any accessories within the movement range
of the windows.
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside
of the vehicle.
Opening windows
▷
Press the switch as far as the resist-
ance point.
The window opens for as long as
the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch past the resistance
point.
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows:
Safety switch
Principle
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-
dren from opening and closing the rear win-
dows with the switches in the rear, for exam-
ple.
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it in this position.
The window is closed but with restricted
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force
exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted.
If an accident of appropriate severity occurs,
the safety function is automatically switched
off.
Overview
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approximately 4 seconds
and hold it in this position.
The window is closed with no anti-trap
mechanism.
Window roller sunblinds
Safety information
WARNING
Safety switch
When the roller sunblinds are closed and the
windows opened, the roller sunblinds can be
heavily stressed during the journey due to the
air stream. The roller sunblinds can become
damaged and endanger vehicle occupants.
There is a danger of injury. Do not open the
windows during the journey when the roller
sunblinds are closed.
Turning the safety functions on/off
Press the key.
The LED is illuminated when the safety
function is switched on.
Glass sunroof
Safety information
WARNING
Operating requirements
The affected window must be closed.
Operation
Pull the roller sunblind out with the loop and
hook into the holder.
Parts of the body may become trapped when
the glass sunroof is operated. There is a
danger of injury. When opening and closing,
make sure that the movement range of the
glass sunroof is kept clear.
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Closing the glass sunroof
With the vehicle key
Opening the glass sunroof
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after unlocking.
The electric glass sunroof with sun protection
is opened for as long as the button on the
vehicle key is pressed.
Closing the glass sunroof
Touch the grooved surface on the outside door
handle of a closed front door with your finger
and hold it there without gripping the door
handle.
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after locking.
The electric glass sunroof with sun protection
is closed for as long as the button on the vehi-
cle key is pressed.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof with sun protection are closed.
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-
rors are folded in provided that they were not
folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-
terior mirrors are not folded in.
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir-
rors are folded in provided that they were not
folded in when the vehicle was locked. If the
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex-
terior mirrors are not folded in.
In the interior
On the outside door handle
Operating requirements
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can
be operated under the following conditions:
Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed with the out-
side door handle without operating the vehicle
key.
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
For a short while after rest state has been
established.
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
General
The function is available with Comfort Access.
General
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example,
in your trouser pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the glass sunroof with the
digital key.
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The glass sunroof closes for as long as
the switch is held. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or is in the raised position,
the sun protection is closed.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
▷
Slide the switch backwards beyond the re-
sistance point.
The sun protection is opened automatically.
If the sun protection is already fully open,
the glass sunroof is opened automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move-
ment.
▷
Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
sistance point.
To open/close the glass sun-
roof/sun protection.
The glass sunroof is closed automatically.
If the glass sunroof is already closed or is
in the raised position, the sun protection is
closed automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move-
ment.
Raising/closing the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly up.
▷
The closed glass sunroof is
raised and the sun protection
opens slightly.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together
▷
Slide the switch back beyond
the resistance point twice in
quick succession.
▷
The opened glass sunroof
closes to the raised position.
The sun protection does not
move.
The glass sunroof and
the sun protection open to-
gether.
▷
The raised glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again
stops the movement.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection separately
▷
Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
sistance point twice in quick succession.
▷
Slide the switch backwards
as far as the resistance point
and hold.
The glass sunroof and the sun protection
close together.
The sun protection opens
for as long as the switch
is pressed. If the sun protec-
tion is already fully open, the
glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the move-
ment.
Comfort position
In some models, wind noise levels inside the
vehicle are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. On these models, the automatic
▷
Slide the switch forwards as far as the re-
sistance point and hold.
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
as far as this comfort position.
Anti-trap mechanism
Pressing the switch again in the interior opens
the electric glass sunroof fully.
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
parts of the body from becoming trapped be-
tween the roof frame and glass sunroof while
the glass sunroof is being closed.
Closing the glass sunroof
automatically
General
Principle
If resistance or an obstruction is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing
operation is interrupted once the roof reaches
the half-open position or when closing from
the raised position.
After locking, the open glass sunroof is auto-
matically moved to the raised position in the
event of rain or after six hours.
Operating requirements
▷
Rain must be able to reach the sensor field
in the area of the interior mirror. The sen-
sor field may be obscured by a car port or
bridge, for example.
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
from an open position
If there is danger from outside the vehicle or
icing, for example, prevents normal closing,
proceed as follows:
▷
▷
Vehicle must be in rest state.
The function must be activated in the set-
tings.
Malfunctions
The open glass sunroof is not moved to the
raised position under the following circumstan-
ces:
1. Close all doors.
2. Establish drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
▷
▷
The glass sunroof is blocked.
3. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
sistance point and hold it in this position.
The anti-trap mechanism cannot be guar-
anteed.
The glass sunroof is closed with restricted
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force
exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted.
▷
There is a system error, for example due
to a temporary open circuit. In this case,
initialising the glass sunroof can help.
An error message is shown on the control dis-
play. No further closure is attempted.
4. Slide the switch forwards once again be-
yond the resistance point and hold until
the glass sunroof closes with no anti-trap
mechanism. Ensure that the closing range
is clear.
If rain detection is not possible due to the sys-
tem, the open glass sunroof is immediately
moved to the raised position. An error mes-
sage is shown on the control display.
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens, then
closes again.
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
from a raised position
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows:
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
In the closed position, the sun protection is
initialized.
Initialisation is complete once the glass sun-
roof and sun visor have opened, then closed
again.
1. Close all doors.
2. Establish drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
3. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
sistance point and hold it in this position.
Initialising after an open circuit
General
If a open circuit occurs while the glass sunroof
is opening or closing, it may only have restric-
ted functionality afterwards. In this case, initial-
ising the system can help.
The system can be initialised if the following
conditions are met:
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked on level ground.
The vehicle does not move until initialisa-
tion is complete.
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is activated.
The outside temperature is above
5 ℃/41 ℉.
During initialisation, the glass sunroof closes
with no anti-trap mechanism.
Ensure that the closing range is clear.
Initialising the system
Press the switch up and hold
until initialisation is complete:
Initialisation begins within 15 seconds.
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
If the backrest is angled too far back, the pro-
tective effect of the seat belt will no longer
be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding un-
der the seat belt in the event of an accident.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Adjust the seat before starting the journey.
Adjust the backrest to the most upright posi-
tion possible, and do not change it during the
journey.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Safe seating position
WARNING
A seat position that suitably meets the needs
of the occupants is essential for relaxed driving
with minimum fatigue.
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust-
ment, make sure that the movement range of
the seat is clear.
In an accident, the correct seat position plays
an important role. Pay attention to the notes in
the following chapters.
For further information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Adjusting the seats
General
The current seat position can be saved using
the memory function.
Overview
Seats, front
Safety information
WARNING
Setting the seat during a journey could cause
the seat to move unexpectedly. You could
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's
side when at a standstill.
The switches for the seat settings are located
at the front seats.
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the forward/back position
Adjusting the backrest angle
Press the switch forwards or backwards.
Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
General
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the stored position
is loaded automatically.
Activating/deactivating the function
Press the switch up or down.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Adjusting the seat angle
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Set automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.
Tilt the switch up or down.
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The curvature is shifted upwards/down-
wards.
Thigh support
Sport seat
Backrest width
Principle
The backrest width can be adjusted to improve
lateral support when cornering.
General
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Pull the lever on the front of the seat and ad-
just the thigh support forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the backrest width
▷
Press the button at the front:
Backrest width is reduced.
Press the button at the rear:
Backrest width is increased.
Multifunction seat
▷
Backrest upper section
Principle
The backrest upper section provides support
for the back in the shoulder region. When ad-
justed correctly, it ensures a relaxed seat posi-
tion, and reduces strain on the shoulder mus-
cles.
Press the switch forwards or backwards.
Lumbar support
General
Principle
When getting out of the vehicle, the backrest
upper section moves all the way back. Before
the start of the journey, the last set position is
automatically moved to.
The curvature of the backrest can be changed
to provide support for the lumbar region, or
lordosis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the
spinal column are supported to encourage an
upright sitting posture.
Adjusting the lumbar support
▷
Press the button at the front/rear:
The curvature is increased/de-
creased.
▷
Press the button at the top/bottom:
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the backrest upper section
Switching on
1.
Press the button. The LED is illumi-
nated.
2. Use the driver's seat switches to adjust the
front passenger seat.
3. If required, save the memory position for
the front passenger seat position.
Switching off
▷
▷
Press the button at the front:
Press the key. The LED is extin-
guished.
The backrest upper section is tilted for-
wards.
The function is also disabled automati-
cally after a period of time.
Press the button at the rear:
The backrest upper section is tilted back-
wards.
Seat massage
Front passenger seat functionality
Principle
The seat massage ensures relaxed muscles
and better blood circulation in the back region
and can prevent signs of fatigue.
Principle
The front passenger seat can be adjusted us-
ing the switches on the driver's seat, for exam-
ple to increase the legroom in the rear.
General
If necessary, the front passenger seat position
can be saved using the memory function.
Eight different massage programmes can be
selected:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pelvic activation.
Overview
Upper-body activation.
Whole body mobilisation.
Back massage.
Buttons in the vehicle
Shoulder massage.
Lumbar massage.
Upper-body training.
Whole body exercise.
Front passenger seat functionality
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust-
ment, make sure that the movement range of
the seat is clear.
Massage function
Calibrating the front seat
1. Push the switch forward again in a longitu-
dinal direction until the seat stops.
Switching on
2. Push the switch forward again until the seat
stops.
Press the button once for each inten-
sity level.
3. Reset the desired seat position.
The highest intensity level is selected if
the three LEDs are illuminated.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
Switching off
If the message is not hidden after repeated
calibration, have the system checked by an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs are extinguished.
Selecting the massage programme
1.
Apps menu
Rear seats
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Seat comfort"
Second-row seating
4. Select the desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
General
6. Select the desired setting.
The backrest angle and the forward/back posi-
tion of the second row of seats can be adjus-
ted.
Calibrating the front seats
The backrest angle for the middle section is
adjusted together with the left rear seat back-
rest.
General
As soon as the electric seat adjustment no lon-
ger functions precisely, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed on the control display.
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Safety information
Overview
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust-
ment, make sure that the movement range of
the seat is clear.
The switches for the seat settings are located
on the seats.
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when folding
down the centre armrest in the rear. There is
a danger of injury. When folding down, make
sure that the movement range of the centre
armrest is kept clear.
Selecting the base position
WARNING
There is risk of entrapment when folding
back the second-row seating. There is a dan-
ger of injury or material damage. Before fold-
ing back the second-row seating, make sure
that the movement range of the seats is kept
clear.
Press the button to move the seat to the base
position.
The process is cancelled if the button is
pressed again.
WARNING
Longitudinal direction
In the folded down state, the seats of the
second-row seating are not locked and can
move. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Fold the seats of the second-row
seating only down with load. When driving
without load, fold back and lock the seats of
the second-row seating prior to departure.
Press the switch forwards or backwards.
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The position of the front seats will be adjusted
automatically if necessary to avoid a collision.
Backrest angle
If the second-row seating is not locked in posi-
tion, an acoustic signal will sound and a warn-
ing icon is shown in the instrument cluster.
Third-row seating
General
The third-row seating consists of two split
seats.
Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
Folding up the rear seat backrest
Access to the third-row seating
Safety information
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured load may be flung into the interior,
for example in the event of an accident or
when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-
vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure
that the rear seat backrest is locked after it
has been folded back.
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured load may be flung into the interior,
for example in the event of an accident or
when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-
vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure
that the rear seat backrest is locked after it
has been folded back.
1. Fold up the rear seat backrest and engage.
Folding down rear seat backrest
1. Fold up the middle part of the second-row
seating if necessary.
2. Press the switch forwards or backwards
once.
2. Set the head restraint correctly if necessary.
The seat moves automatically into the respec-
tive end position.
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Unlocking from the second-row seating
Folding down rear seat backrest
1. Push the head restraints downwards, see
2. Push the lever forwards to unlock the rear
seat backrest.
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest
forwards.
Unlocking from the third-row seating
3. Fold the rear seat backrest downwards.
Getting out from the third-row seating
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest
forwards.
The second-row seating can be folded down
via the switch.
Seat belts
For further information:
General
Access to the third-row seating, see page 115
For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the ve-
hicle is equipped with five or seven seat belts.
However, they can only provide a protective
effect when applied correctly.
Rear seat backrest emergency release
General
Before each journey, always make sure that
all occupants have fastened their seat belts.
The airbags supplement the seat belts as an
additional safety device. The airbags are not a
substitute for the seat belts.
The two outer backrests of the second-row
seating can be folded down manually, for ex-
ample if there is an electrical fault.
All belt anchorages are designed to achieve
the best possible protective effect of the seat
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
belts with proper use of the seat belts and cor-
rect seat setting.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide
the protection for which they have been de-
signed. A slack seat belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the wearer.
The two outer seat belt buckles on the rear
seats are intended for those sitting on the left
and right.
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-
tion of the seat belt strap by polishes, oils
and chemicals and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out using
a mild soap and water solution. The seat
belt should be replaced if the seat belt strap
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
Seat belts should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only
be used by one occupant; it is forbidden to
put a belt around a child being carried on the
occupant's lap.
The inner seat belt buckle on the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
For further information:
Safety information
WARNING
If a seat belt is used by more than one per-
son at the same time, the protective effect of
the seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There
is a danger of injury or danger to life. Only
one person should use each seat belt at any
one time. Do not allow infants and children
to travel on the lap of another occupant. In-
stead, secure the infant or child in child re-
straint systems intended for this purpose.
It is essential to replace the entire seat belt
assembly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is not
obvious.
WARNING
No modifications or additions should be
made by the user that will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-
bly from being adjusted to remove slack.
WARNING
The protective effect of the seat belts may be
restricted or may even fail completely if the
seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is
not worn correctly, additional injuries can be
caused, for example in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or avoidance manoeuvre. There
is a danger of injury or danger to life. Make
sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened
their seat belts correctly.
WARNING
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the middle seat belt is not
ensured. There is a danger of injury or dan-
ger to life. Lock the wider rear seat backrest
when using the middle seat belt.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the
bony structure of the body and should be
worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable.
Wearing the lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
WARNING
The protective effect of the seat belts may be
restricted or may even fail completely in the
following situations:
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If the seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, dirty or have been modified in
another way.
▷
▷
The length of the diagonal shoulder strap
adjusts itself automatically to allow free-
dom of movement.
The seat belt tensioners or belt retrac-
tors have been modified.
To release the seat belt, press the button
on the seat belt buckle.
Seat belts can be damaged in an accident
without the damage necessarily being appa-
rent. There is a danger of injury or danger
to life. Do not modify seat belts, seat belt
buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt retractors
and belt anchor points and ensure that they
are kept clean. After an accident, have the
seat belts inspected at an authorised Service
Partner or another qualified Service Partner
or a specialist workshop.
Fastening the seat belt
1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it
slowly over the shoulder and pelvis.
2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must be heard
to engage.
Correct seat belt use
▷
▷
▷
Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis
and shoulder, close to the body and without
twisting.
Make sure that the seat belt is positioned
low at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The
seat belt must not press on the abdomen.
Unfastening the seat belt
1. Hold the seat belt firmly.
The seat belt must not be allowed to rub
against sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be trapped.
2. Press the red button on the seat belt
buckle.
▷
▷
Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
3. Guide the seat belt back up to the auto-
matic reel.
Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pull-
ing upwards on the upper body area.
Seat belt warning
Setting for automatic retracting seat
belts
General
Check whether the seat belts are fastened cor-
rectly.
▷
Draw the seat belt tongue attached to the
seat belt across the body and press it into
the seat belt buckle until a 'click' is heard.
The seat belt warning becomes active in the
following situations:
▷
Adjustment of the belt length is very im-
portant. To adjust the lap belt and check
whether the seat belt buckle has locked
correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder
strap until the lap belt fits tightly.
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
When objects are lying on a seat.
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Safety information
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
and the seat belt warning is active.
WARNING
If the head restraints are removed or incor-
rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec-
tive effect as intended and head and neck in-
juries may result. There is a danger of injury.
A Check Control message is shown where ap-
plicable. Check whether the seat belt has been
fastened correctly.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment and national-market version.
▷
Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraints on all occupied seats.
Icon
Meaning
▷
Adjust the head restraint so that its cen-
tre supports the back of the head at eye
level where possible.
Seat belt is not buckled.
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
Seat belt is only buckled on the
corresponding seat.
Seat belt on the corresponding
seat is not buckled.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the head restraint is moved. There is a dan-
ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
make sure that the movement range is kept
clear.
Safety function
In critical driving situations, for example full
braking, the front seat belts are tensioned au-
tomatically.
If the driving situation passes without an acci-
dent, the belt tension is slackened again.
WARNING
If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
cally, stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat
belt by pressing the red button in the seat belt
buckle. Fasten the seat belt again before con-
tinuing driving.
Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-
tective effect of the head restraint in the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
▷
▷
▷
Do not fit any covers on the seats or
head restraints.
Do not hang objects such as coat hang-
ers directly on the head restraint.
Front head restraints
Only use accessories that have been
classified as safe for attaching to the
head restraint.
General
The current head restraint position can be
saved with the memory function.
▷
Do not use any accessories, for example
cushions, during the journey.
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Active head restraint
Adjusting the side sections
In the event of a severe rear-end collision, the
active head restraint automatically reduces the
distance to the head.
Check the active head restraint if it has been
subjected to an accident or is damaged, and
have it replaced if necessary.
Adjusting the height
Fold the side sections forwards to increase lat-
eral support in the rest position.
Removing the head restraints
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
Press the switch up or down.
Adjusting the distance
If the head restraints are removed or incor-
rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec-
tive effect as intended and head and neck in-
juries may result. There is a danger of injury.
▷
Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraints on all occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so that its cen-
tre supports the back of the head at eye
level where possible.
▷
▷
Back: press the button and push back the
head restraint.
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
Forward: pull the head restraint forwards.
After adjusting the distance, make sure that
the head restraint engages correctly.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Folding down the head restraints
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the head restraint is moved. There is a dan-
ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
make sure that the movement range is kept
clear.
WARNING
▷
▷
Backwards: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold back the head restraint.
Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-
tective effect of the head restraint in the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
Forwards: fold the head restraint forwards
as far as it will go. Ensure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
▷
▷
▷
Do not fit any covers on the seats or
head restraints.
Do not hang objects such as coat hang-
ers directly on the head restraint.
Adjusting the height
Only use accessories that have been
classified as safe for attaching to the
head restraint.
▷
Do not use any accessories, for example
cushions, during the journey.
Folding down the head restraints
General
▷
▷
Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint downwards.
The outer head restraints can be folded back
to improve rear visibility. Only fold back the
head restraint if no one is sitting on the seat in
question.
Up: push the head restraint upwards.
After adjusting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing the head restraint
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Installing head restraints
After installation, make sure that the head re-
straint engages correctly.
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Cushions for the rear head
restraints
Overview
Only use the cushions with the vehicle at a
standstill.
1. Adjust the head restraint to a sufficient
height.
2. Attach the cushion and place the cushion
strap around the head restraint, arrow 1.
Icon
Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select exterior mirror, automatic
parking function.
3. Close the press studs, arrow 2.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the key.
General
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is loaded
automatically.
Selecting the exterior mirror
To switch to the other mirror:
Push the switch.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Safety information
Malfunction
In case of an electrical failure, adjust the ex-
terior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance from road users
behind the vehicle could be incorrectly esti-
mated, for example when changing driving
lane. There is a risk of accident. Look over
your shoulder to estimate the distance from
following traffic.
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Activating the automatic parking
function
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirror
1.
Push the switch to the driver's mir-
ror position.
NOTICE
Because of its width, the vehicle could sus-
tain damage in car washes. There is a risk
of material damage. Before washing, fold the
mirrors in manually or with the button.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
The automatic parking function is deactivated
when the trailer socket is occupied.
Press the key.
Deactivating the automatic parking
function
Push the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds
up to approx. 20 km/h/15 mph.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
Rear-view mirror with
automatic anti-dazzle
function
▷
▷
In car washes.
In narrow streets.
Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold
out when the vehicle reaches a speed of ap-
proximately 40 km/h/25 mph.
General
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Automatic heating
The function is controlled by photocells:
When required, both exterior mirrors are au-
tomatically heated when drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.
Overview
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dim-
med automatically. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this function.
Automatic parking function
Principle
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passenger's side is tilted down-
wards. When parking, for example, this gives
the driver a better view of the kerb or other
objects near the ground.
Operating requirements
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
▷
Do not obstruct the zone between the inte-
rior mirror and the windscreen.
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Memory function
Principle
The memory function enables the following
settings to be stored and retrieved when re-
quired:
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
may cause the steering wheel to move unex-
pectedly. You could lose control of the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust
the steering wheel when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
Steering wheel position.
Height of the Head-up display.
General
For each driver profile, two memory slots can
be assigned with different settings.
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
General
The following settings are not saved:
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
▷
▷
Backrest width.
Lumbar support.
Safety information
The current steering wheel position can be
saved with the memory function.
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving may
cause the seat or steering wheel to move
unexpectedly. You could lose control of the
vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the memory function when the vehicle is at
standstill.
Temporarily, the steering wheel moves to the
highest position to facilitate getting into and
out of the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust-
ment, make sure that the movement range of
the seat is clear.
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel
to the correct forward/back position and height
for your seat position.
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
The memory buttons are on the front doors.
Storing settings
1. Set the desired position.
2.
Press the button. The LED is illumi-
nated.
3. Press the desired Memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Go to Settings
Press the desired Memory button 1 or 2.
The saved position is retrieved.
The operation is halted when a seat set-
ting switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
Seat climate control
Various air conditioning functions are available
for the seats.
For further information:
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Carrying children safely
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
Child restraint systems and their parts can
get very hot when exposed to direct sun-
light. Contact with hot parts can cause burns.
There is a danger of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight;
cover the child restraint system if necessary.
If required, allow the child restraint system to
cool down before transporting a child. Do not
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Important considerations
Safety information
WARNING
Children on the rear seat
General
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Wherever possible, children younger than
12 years old or shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft should
be transported only on the rear seats in child
restraint systems appropriate for their age,
weight and stature. Children aged 12 years and
older must be secured with a seat belt once a
suitable child restraint system is no longer an
option due to their age, weight or stature.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
Safety information
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
WARNING
Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without using ad-
ditional child restraint systems. The protec-
tive effect of the seat belts may be restricted
or may even fail completely if the seat belts
are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is not worn
correctly, additional injuries can be caused,
for example in the event of an accident, brak-
ing or avoidance manoeuvre. There is a dan-
ger of injury or danger to life. Children shorter
WARNING
Hot vehicle can have fatal consequences,
in particular for children or pets. There is a
danger of injury or danger to life. Do not
leave anyone unsupervised in the vehicle, es-
pecially children or pets.
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
than 150 cm, 5 ft must be secured in suitable
child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
Not for Australia:Children on the
front passenger seat
If child restraint systems and their attach-
ment systems have been damaged or sub-
jected to stresses in an accident, their pro-
tective effect may be restricted or may fail
completely. A child might not be adequately
restrained, for example in the event of an
accident, braking or avoidance manoeuvre.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
General
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, make sure
that the front passenger airbag is deactivated.
If it is not possible to deactivate the front
passenger airbag, do not carry children in
rearward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat.
Do not continue to use child restraint systems
which are damaged or have been subjected
to stresses in an accident.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or subjected to stresses in an accident, have
them checked and replaced by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
For further information:
Deactivation of the front passenger airbag, see
Safety information
WARNING
DANGER
If the seat is not set properly or the child
seat has been installed incorrectly, the child
restraint system may have restricted or no
stability at all. There is a danger of injury
or danger to life. Make sure that the child
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back-
rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and
adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that
the seats and their backrests are correctly
engaged or locked. If possible and if neces-
sary, adjust the height of the head restraints
or remove them.
If triggered, an active front passenger airbag
can fatally injure a child in a child restraint
system which is mounted facing backwards.
There is a danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger airbag is deactivated and the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
Fitting child restraint
systems
General
Before installation
Make sure rear seat backrests are locked in
place before fitting child restraint systems.
Please comply with the operating and safety
instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching
and using child restraint systems.
Move rear seats to rearmost position to make
it easier to fit child restraint system.
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Third-row seating
Before fitting a child restraint system in the
third-row seating, observe the following, de-
pending on the equipment:
Not for Australia:On the front
passenger seat
Deactivating the airbag
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Roll up the luggage compartment cover
and remove the case.
DANGER
Lower the electric luggage compartment
cover.
If triggered, an active front passenger airbag
can fatally injure a child in a child restraint
system which is mounted facing backwards.
There is a danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger airbag is deactivated and the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
Remove the luggage compartment partition
net.
Move the seats and backrest of the sec-
ond-row seating all the way forwards.
Fold down and lock the relevant backrest of
the second row of seats.
Before installing a rearward-facing child re-
straint system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front passenger airbag is
deactivated. If the airbag cannot be deactiva-
ted, do not install a rearward-facing child re-
straint system.
The head restraints of the third-row seating
are put into the upper position.
Do not make any further changes to the set-
tings.
For Australia: installation of child
restraint systems
Please note the following warning because
your vehicle has been equipped with a front
airbag for the front passenger seat that cannot
be deactivated:
For further information:
Deactivation of the front passenger airbag, see
Rearward-facing child restraint
systems
It is not recommended to use rear-
ward-facing child restraint systems on
the front passenger seat.
DANGER
If triggered, an active front passenger airbag
can fatally injure a child in a child restraint
system which is mounted facing backwards.
There is a danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger airbag is deactivated and the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
Extreme hazard
Do not use rearward-facing child restraint
systems on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it.
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
ISOFIX or i-Size child safety
seat fasteners
General
Please comply with the operating and safety
instructions provided by the, child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching
and using ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys-
tems.
Follow the note on the sun visor on the pas-
senger's side.
Never use rearward facing child restraint sys-
tems on a seat with an activated front airbag.
Use may result in death or serious injury to
children.
Suitable ISOFIX or i-Size child
restraint systems
For further information:
Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see
Seat position and height
After installing a universal child restraint sys-
tem, move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go and adjust it to the high-
est position. This seat position and height pro-
vides the best possible belt routing and protec-
tion in the event of an accident.
i-Size child restraint systems
General
i-Size is a legal regulation for child restraint
systems which is used for the approval of child
restraint systems.
After installing a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the inclination of the seat backrest
to achieve the best possible belt routing.
The system represents a further development
of the ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.
ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be at-
tached to anchors with i-Size markings.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is
in front of the child seat's seat belt guide, care-
fully move the front passenger seat forwards
until the best possible seat belt guide is ach-
ieved.
Icon
Meaning
If this icon is seen in the vehi-
cle, the vehicle has also been
approved in accordance with
i-Size. The icon shows the
mounts for the system's lower
anchors. The lower anchors
meet the European i-Size re-
quirements.
Backrest width
With adjustable backrest width: before instal-
ling a child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat, fully open the backrest width. Do
not change the backrest width from this point
on and do not retrieve a seat position from the
memory.
The corresponding icon shows
the top tether eyelet.
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
ISOFIX child restraint systems
General
WARNING
ISOFIX is a legal regulation for child restraint
systems which is used for the approval of child
restraint systems.
If the child restraint system lower anchors are
not engaged correctly, the protective effect of
the child restraint system will be restricted.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Make sure the lower anchor points have en-
gaged correctly and the child restraint system
rests firmly against the backrest.
ISOFIX child restraint systems can be attached
to mountings marked with ISOFIX.
Only certain ISOFIX child restraint systems are
permitted for use on the designated seats. The
associated size class and size category are
denoted by a letter or ISO reference on a plate
on the child seat.
WARNING
Icon
Meaning
The mounts for the lower anchors and the
attachment points for child restraint systems
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Only attach child restraint systems
to the corresponding mounts for the lower
anchors or the attachment points.
If this icon is seen in the ve-
hicle, the vehicle has been
approved in accordance with
the ISOFIX standard. The icon
shows the mounts for the sys-
tem's lower anchors. The lower
mountings comply with ISOFIX
requirements.
With universal approval: the
corresponding icon shows the
top tether attachment point.
Position
Icon
Meaning
The corresponding icon shows
the fixtures for the lower ISO-
FIX anchors or i-Size mount-
ing.
Fixtures for lower anchors
General
Note the following when fitting child restraint
systems with integrated safety belt to the
mounts for the lower anchors:
The total weight of the child and child restraint
system must not exceed 33 kg, 73 lbs.
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Child restraint systems with
upper restraint strap
General
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the informa-
tion, operating and safety instructions of the
child restraint system manufacturer.
The fixtures for the lower anchors are located
behind the marked covers. To expose the an-
chorage points, open the flaps upwards.
Safety information
WARNING
Before fitting child restraint systems
If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective
effect will be reduced. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure that the upper retaining
strap is not twisted and is not routed to the
upper attachment point over sharp edges.
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Fitting child restraint systems
1. Install child restraint system, see the manu-
facturer's instructions.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
attachment correctly engages in the lower
anchor on both sides.
WARNING
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-
rest may fold forward in certain situations, for
example in the event of braking manoeuvre
or an accident. There is a danger of injury or
danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat
backrests are locked.
With comfort seats in the rear: fitting
child restraint systems
To facilitate installation, make additional set-
tings if necessary:
1. Tilt the backrest back slightly.
2. Install child restraint system, see the manu-
facturer's instructions.
3. Make sure that the child restraint system
attachment correctly engages in the lower
anchor on both sides.
WARNING
The mounts for the lower anchors and the
attachment points for child restraint systems
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Only attach child restraint systems
to the corresponding mounts for the lower
anchors or the attachment points.
4. After installation, adjust the backrest for-
wards slightly, so that the child restraint
system rests lightly against the backrest.
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Move the seat of the second-row seating to
the base position.
Icon
Meaning
2. Raise head restraint if necessary.
The corresponding icon shows
the top tether eyelet.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
or along both sides of the head restraint
mounts to the attachment point.
4. Guide the retaining strap between the seat
backrest and the luggage compartment
cover.
5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
6. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Suitable seats for child
restraint systems
Depending on the equipment, there are two or
three attachment points for the upper retaining
strap of child restraint systems.
General
The legal provisions determining which child
seat is permitted for which age and body size
may vary from country to country. Please com-
ply with the relevant national legal provisions.
Routing the retaining strap
Additional information is available from an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
For detailed information about using child re-
straint systems:
Seats for child restraint systems, see
page 434.
1
Direction of travel
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint
Seats and child restraint systems
The following section provides information on
which child restraint system is suitable for
which seat in the vehicle.
Hook of the upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Seat backrest
Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:
Upper retaining strap
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Seat
Airbag, front Mounting
passenger
7, 9 – e)
a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.
Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the
front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the
rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.
e) When using child restraint systems in the third-row seating, move the second-row seating
forwards and lock the backrest in the folded-down position.
f) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Right-hand drive vehicle, seats:
Seat
Airbag, front Mounting
passenger
1 a)
ON only for-
ward-facing
child restraint
system
OFF only
rearward fac-
ing child re-
straint sys-
tem
3
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Seat
Airbag, front Mounting
passenger
4, 6 – b)
f)
5 – c, d)
7, 9 – e)
a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.
Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the
front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the
rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.
e) When using child restraint systems in the third-row seating, move the second-row seating
forwards and lock the backrest in the folded-down position.
f) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Icon
Meaning
Icon
Meaning
Not suitable for child restraint systems.
Suitable for ISOFIX child re-
straint systems.
Suitable for belted child restraint systems in the
Universal category.
Suitable for ISOFIX and i-Size
child restraint systems.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the semi-
universal category if the vehicle and seat are
given in the list of vehicle types from the manu-
facturer of the child restraint system.
Suitable for child restraint sys-
tems with an upper retaining
strap.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the following child restraint systems:
Recommended child seats
▷
▷
▷
▷
Maxi-Cosi Pebble 360.
Please comply with the operating and safety
instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching
and using child restraint systems.
Maxi-Cosi FamilyFix 360 Base.
With i-Size: Römer TRIFIX 2.
With ISOFIX: Römer Duo Plus.
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Maxi-Cosi 2wayPearl & 2wayFix.
danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat
backrests are locked.
Römer KIDFIX series.
For Australia:Child restraint
systems
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective
effect will be reduced. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure that the upper retaining
strap is not twisted and is not routed to the
upper attachment point over sharp edges.
General
In accordance with ADR 34/03, provisions
have been made to allow installation of a child
restraint system at each rear seat position.
The anchoring hooks which belong to the up-
per restraining strap of the child restraint sys-
tem - AS 1754, can be applied immediately to
the relevant mount.
Attachment points
Icon
Meaning
Please refer strictly to the installation instruc-
tions supplied with the child restraint system.
The corresponding icon shows
the top tether eyelet.
Each seat position is fitted with a head re-
straint.
Safety information
WARNING
Anchorages for child restraint systems are
designed to withstand only those loads im-
posed by correctly fitted child restraint sys-
tems. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the ve-
hicle. After using and removing child restraint
systems, fold away the anchor brackets if
necessary.
Depending on the equipment, there are two
outer attachment points or three other attach-
ment points for child restraint systems with
tether straps.
WARNING
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-
rest may fold forward in certain situations, for
example in the event of braking manoeuvre
or an accident. There is a danger of injury or
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Carrying children safely
CONTROLS
Routing the retaining strap
Securing doors and
windows in the rear
General
In certain situations, for example when carry-
ing children, it may be advisable to secure the
rear doors and windows.
Doors
1
Direction of travel
2
3
4
5
6
Head restraint
Hook of the upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Move the seat of the second-row seating to
Push up the locking lever on the rear doors.
The respective door can now only be opened
from the outside.
2. Raise head restraint if necessary.
Rear safety switch
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint mounts or along both
sides of the head restraint mounts to the
attachment point.
Middle seat: raise the head restraint if nec-
essary by pressing the button on the brack-
ets. Guide the upper retaining strap be-
tween the head restraint mounts or along
both sides of the head restraint mounts to
the attachment point.
4. Guide the retaining strap between the seat
backrest and the luggage compartment
cover.
Press the button on the driver's door.
Different functions are locked and can-
not be operated in the rear, for exam-
ple the window lifters.
5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
6. Pull the retaining strap taut.
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
tion of travel and provides assistance when
driving off.
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Driving off
To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.
The parking brake is automatically released.
Depending on the vehicle load and driving sit-
uation or in trailer operation, the vehicle may
roll backwards a little.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Acoustic protection for pedestrians
Start/Stop button
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, acoustic protection for pedes-
trians generates continuous driving noise in
vehicles with electric or electrically assisted
drives.
Principle
Drive-ready state is switched on and off by
pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷
With a stationary vehicle and turned on
drive-ready state as soon as the selector
lever position P is exited.
General
Drive-ready state is switched on by pressing
the Start/Stop button with the brake applied.
▷
With electric driving up to 30 km/h/20 mph.
A loudspeaker system plays the noise outside
the vehicle. As a result, other road users, for
example pedestrians or cyclists, can detect the
vehicle better.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state off again and standby state
is switched on.
For further information:
▷
▷
Automatic Start/Stop
function
Driving off
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Select the drive position.
3. Drive off.
Principle
The Automatic Start/Stop function helps you
to save fuel. It does this by switching off the
engine when the vehicle stops, for example
in congestion or at traffic lights. Drive-ready
state remains switched on. For driving off, the
engine starts automatically.
When stopping
Selector lever positions D, S or R
On uphill gradients, the system prevents the
vehicle from rolling against the selected direc-
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
General
The engine is not shut down automatically in
the following situations:
Each time the engine is started via the Start/
Stop button, the Automatic Start/Stop function
is switched to standby.
▷
▷
On a steep downhill gradient.
The function is activated at low speeds.
The brake pedal has not been pressed hard
enough.
Engine shutdown
▷
When the outside temperature is high and
the automatic air conditioning is switched
on.
Operating requirements
The engine is automatically shut down when
stationary when the following conditions are
met:
▷
▷
Interior is not heated or cooled to the de-
sired temperature.
Where there is a risk of condensation when
the automatic air conditioning is switched
on.
▷
▷
Selector lever in selector lever position D.
Brake pedal remains pressed while the ve-
hicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is kept
stationary by Automatic Hold.
▷
Engine or other parts are not at operating
temperature.
▷
Driver's seat belt fastened or driver's door
closed.
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.
Sharp steering wheel angle or steering op-
eration.
Manual engine shutdown
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle came to a stop, it can be
switched off manually:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery charge state very low.
At high altitudes.
The bonnet is unlocked.
Hill Descent Control is activated.
Park Assist is activated.
▷
Rapidly press the brake pedal from the cur-
rent position.
▷
Engage selector lever in position P.
For stop-and-go traffic.
If all the operating requirements have been
met, the engine is stopped.
Selector lever position in N, S or R.
After reversing.
When using fuel with high ethanol content.
Air conditioning when the vehicle is
parked
The amount of air of the air conditioning is
reduced when the engine is not running.
Engine start
Operating requirements
For driving off, the engine starts automatically
under the following conditions:
Display in the instrument cluster
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Au-
tomatic Start/Stop function is
ready for automatic engine start.
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
With Automatic Hold activated: press the
accelerator pedal.
Driving off
Accelerate as usual after starting the engine.
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Safety function
After an automatic shut down, the engine will
not restart automatically if one of the following
conditions is met:
Without mild hybrid technology: via
button
▷
Driver's seat belt unfastened and driver's
door open.
▷
Bonnet has been unlocked.
Several indicator lights illuminate for various
lengths of time.
The engine can only be started using the Start/
Stop button.
Press the key.
System limits
Even if you do not want to drive off, the en-
gine restarts automatically in the following sit-
uations:
▷
LED illuminates: Automatic Start/
Stop function is deactivated.
▷
The LED is off: Automatic Start/Stop func-
tion is activated.
▷
In case of excessive warming of the interior
when the air conditioning function is turned
on.
Without mild hybrid technology: via
iDrive
▷
▷
In case of excessive cooling of the interior
when the heating is turned on.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Where there is a risk of condensation when
the automatic air conditioning is switched
on.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Auto Start/Stop"
▷
Without mild hybrid technology:
In case of a steering operation.
6. Select the desired setting.
▷
▷
▷
When changing the selector lever position
from D or P.
Via selector lever position
The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de-
activated in selector lever position S.
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
When starting an oil level measurement.
Via Driving Experience Control
The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de-
activated in the SPORT drive mode of Driving
Experience Control.
Manually deactivating the system
Principle
The engine is not switched off automatically.
During an automatic engine shutdown, the en-
gine is started.
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Parking the vehicle during
automatic engine shutdown
Safety information
During an automatic engine shutdown, the ve-
hicle can be parked safely, for example in order
to exit it.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away by, for example, applying the
parking brake.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged.
Selector lever positions
2. Apply the parking brake.
D Drive position
Selector lever position for all normal driving.
All gears for driving forwards are selected au-
tomatically.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations the Automatic Start/Stop
function is deactivated automatically for safety
reasons, for example if the absence of the
driver is detected.
R reverse gear
Only engage selector lever position R when the
vehicle is stationary.
Malfunction
The Automatic Start/Stop function no longer
shuts down the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is shown. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
N Neutral
In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be
pushed or can roll without drivetrain, for exam-
ple in car washes.
P Park
Steptronic transmission
General
Selector lever position once the vehicle is
parked, for example. In selector lever posi-
tion P, the transmission blocks the drivetrain.
Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. With the shift paddle,
there is the option of changing gear manually if
required.
Only engage selector lever position P when the
vehicle is stationary.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged in situations such as the following:
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state
when selector lever position R, D, or S is
engaged.
The selector lever returns to the centre po-
sition when released.
▷
▷
After switching off the standby state when
selector lever position N is engaged.
While the vehicle is at a standstill and se-
lector lever position D, S, or R is engaged,
the driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driv-
er's door is opened and the brake is not
depressed.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. The vehicle could
otherwise start to move.
Engaging selector lever position P
For further information:
Engaging selector lever positions
General
Apply the brake until ready to drive off, other-
wise the vehicle will move when drive position
or reverse gear is selected.
Press button P.
The transmission lock is engaged.
Operating requirements
The selector lever will only move from posi-
tion P to another selector lever position if drive-
ready state is switched on and the brake is
pressed.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General
In some situations, the vehicle may need to roll
a short distance without drivetrain, for example
in a conveyor car wash, or when being pushed.
It may not be possible to move out of selector
lever position P until all technical conditions
are met.
Engaging selector lever position N
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
NOTICE
The selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are locked. There is a risk of
material damage. Do not switch off standby
state if the vehicle is to roll, e.g. in conveyor
car washes.
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Activating the Sport programme
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
the brake.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and
switch off Automatic Hold.
3. Press the brake.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
Standby state then remains switched on
and a Check Control message is shown.
The vehicle can now roll.
Pull the selector lever out of selector lever po-
sition D to D/S.
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged after approximately 35 minutes.
The gear selected is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for example S1.
If there is a fault, it may not be possible to
change the selector lever position.
The Sport programme of the transmission is
activated.
Unlock the parking lock electronically if neces-
sary.
For further information:
Ending Sport programme
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
Unlocking the parking lock electronically, see
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum per-
formance.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the
regular full-throttle position; some resistance
will be felt.
Sport programme S
Unlocking the parking lock
electronically
Principle
In the Sport programme, the gear shift points
and gear shift times are configured for more
sporty driving. For example, the transmission
shifts up later and the gearshift times are
shorter.
General
Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g.
to manoeuvre the vehicle out of a danger area
in the event of a fault.
Before unlocking the parking lock, secure the
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away, for ex-
ample with a chock.
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
shown in the instrument cluster.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press the Start/Stop button three times
quickly; do not press the brake when doing
so.
While pulling and holding the right shift
paddle, pull the left shift paddle.
2. Press the brake.
Permanent manual mode
In Sport programme S, pulling a shift paddle
causes the system to switch permanently to
manual mode M.
3. Press the selector lever to position N.
A corresponding Check Control message is
shown.
Position N is displayed on the selector
lever.
The gear selected is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for example M1.
4. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and
then secure it against rolling away.
It is possible to change to automatic mode:
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
shown in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
While pulling and holding the right shift
paddle, pull the left shift paddle.
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
Principle
If M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, the transmission will no longer shift
back to M1. These shift characteristics are re-
tained until M1 is engaged manually or manual
mode M is exited.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel enable
the gears to be changed manually.
General
Gearshift
Shifting gears
Gear shifting is only carried out at the appro-
priate rotational speed and vehicle speed.
Even in manual mode, the transmission
switches automatically in certain situa-
tions, e.g. when speed limits are reached.
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle causes the system to switch to manual
mode temporarily.
▷
▷
To shift up: pull the right shift paddle.
To shift down: pull the left shift paddle.
The gear selected is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for example D1.
The gear selected appears briefly in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the gear currently in
use.
The transmission reverts to automatic mode
from manual mode after a certain period of
time of moderate driving without acceleration
or gear shifts using the shift paddles.
It is possible to change to automatic mode:
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
For further information:
Advanced mode
Running in, see page 338.
General
Operating requirements
Depending on the equipment, the Steptronic
transmission offers an advanced mode with
adapted shift characteristics.
Launch Control is available when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
journey of at least 10 km, 6 miles.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic downshift to the lowest possible
gear.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts
down to the lowest possible gear.
Start up with Launch Control
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
2.
Press the button.
The Steptronic transmission does not shift
up automatically in manual mode when
speed limits are reached.
3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.
4. Engage selector lever position S.
5. Press the brake firmly with the left foot.
There is no downshift for kickdown.
6. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond
the resistance at the full-throttle position
and hold, kickdown.
Activating advanced mode
Advanced mode is active in manual mode
A destination flag is shown in the instru-
ment cluster.
when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Depending on the equipment, the advanced
mode can also be activated in manual mode
as follows:
7. The engine speed for pulling away is adjus-
ted. Wait briefly until the engine speed is
constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this
position.
▷
▷
"SPORT PLUS": drive mode is selected.
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
8. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the
destination flag illuminating.
Launch Control
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifts are automatic as long as the desti-
nation flag is displayed and the accelerator
pedal is not released.
Principle
When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch
Control permits optimised acceleration on a
road surface that offers plenty of grip.
Using again during a journey
Once Launch Control has been used, the
transmission requires a short time to cool
down before Launch Control can be used
again. Launch Control adapts to the ambient
conditions when used again.
General
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear, as this feature subjects the vehi-
cle to very high stresses and loads.
When driving off with Launch Control, do not
turn the steering wheel.
Do not use Launch Control when running in.
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-
namic Stability Control as soon as possible.
Deactivating manually
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until
SPRINT is no longer shown in the instru-
ment cluster.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode
without Launch Control.
▷
▷
While pulling and holding the right shift
paddle, pull the left shift paddle.
Press the selector lever from position S to
position D.
Steptronic sport
transmission: sprint function
Driving Experience Control
Principle
The Driving Experience Control influences,
among other things, the characteristics of the
driving dynamics of the vehicle.
Principle
Depending on the equipment, the sprint func-
tion can be used when the driver is about to
accelerate. The sprint function prepares the
drivetrain for the acceleration.
Various drive modes allow the vehicle to be
adapted to suit the situation.
General
General
The following systems are influenced, for ex-
ample:
Activating the sprint function makes the vehi-
cle's response characteristics more dynamic.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.
Activating
1. Pull and hold the left shift paddle until
SPRINT is shown in the instrument cluster.
Suspension.
Steering.
Display in the instrument cluster.
Cruise Control.
▷
The transmission changes down to the
lowest possible gear and switches to
manual mode M.
Overview
▷
A dynamic setting is activated for the
drivetrain.
Buttons in the vehicle
2. Change gears manually.
Deactivating automatically
The sprint function ends automatically if the
vehicle is driven moderately for a certain
amount of time.
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
ECO PRO
Button
Drive mode
The ECO PRO drive mode provides a con-
sumption-optimised setting.
SPORT
SPORT PLUS
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
INDIVIDUAL configuration
COMFORT
General
For some drive modes there is another individ-
ually adjustable mode.
ECO PRO
The most recent custom configuration is acti-
vated when the drive mode is called up again.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Displays in the instrument cluster
Configuring and resetting
The selected drive mode is
shown in the instrument cluster.
For example, ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive
mode:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
Activating/deactivating the drive
mode
Press the button of the desired drive mode
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
6. Select the desired setting.
To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default
setting:
When the drive mode is changed, the current
drive mode is deactivated.
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Activating INDIVIDUAL
Press the button of the desired drive mode
several times.
Drive modes in detail
COMFORT
The COMFORT drive mode is a balanced
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
mised driving.
Parking brake
Principle
SPORT
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
The SPORT drive mode is a dynamic setting
for greater agility with an optimised suspen-
sion.
SPORT PLUS
The SPORT PLUS drive mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adapted
drivetrain.
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Safety information
Overview
Button in the vehicle
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
▷
▷
Apply the parking brake.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
on uphill or downhill gradient.
Parking brake
▷
Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
Applying the parking brake
When the vehicle is stationary
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Pull the switch.
The LED is illuminated.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated red.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
The parking brake is engaged.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
While driving
The parking brake can be used as an emer-
gency braking function while driving:
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
Pull and hold the switch. The vehicle
brakes hard for as long as the switch is
pulled.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is shown.
Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stationary.
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Engaging the parking brake
automatically
1. Switch on standby state.
In some situations, the parking brake is en-
gaged automatically, for example, by Auto-
matic Hold.
2.
Pull the switch with the brake ap-
plied or the selector lever in position P and
then press it.
In selector lever position N, the parking brake
will not be engaged automatically.
The procedure can take a few seconds. Any
sounds that occur are normal.
The indicator light extinguishes as
soon as the parking brake is opera-
tional again.
Release the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Automatic Hold
2.
Press the switch with the brake ap-
plied or the selector lever in position P.
Principle
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-
matically applying and releasing the brake, for
example in stop-and-go traffic.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically released on
when you drive off.
The vehicle is held automatically when at a
standstill.
On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle
from rolling back when driving off.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
General
Malfunction
If a parking brake has failed or malfunctioned,
secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away before leaving the vehicle.
The parking brake is released automatically
when the following conditions are met:
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
If the driver’s door is open for more than
one second and no pedal is pressed during
this time.
A Check Control message is shown.
After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent
it from rolling away, for example with a chock.
▷
If the moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still with the parking brake.
After an open circuit
To restore the operability of the parking brake
after a power failure, an initialisation may be
required.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
Activate Automatic Hold
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
▷
▷
Apply the parking brake.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
on uphill or downhill gradient.
2.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated.
▷
Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last
selected setting is retained.
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Automatic Hold holds the vehicle
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Once the vehicle has stopped, it is au-
tomatically secured from rolling away
once the indicator light lights up green.
Opening and closing doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Operating vehicle equipment.
Driving off
To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
The brake is released automatically and the
parking brake indicator light is extinguished.
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is applied automatically if
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle
is exited while Automatic Hold is holding the
vehicle.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not applied automatically
if drive-ready state was switched off while the
vehicle was rolling to a stop. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Deactivate Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold
Press the key.
The LED is extinguished.
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
The indicator light extinguishes.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point
and hold it there for as long as you wish to
indicate a turn.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also depress the brake when deactivating.
High-beam headlight,
headlight flasher
Turn indicators
Press the lever forwards or pull it back.
Turn indicator in exterior mirror
To ensure that the indicator lamps in the ex-
terior mirrors can be seen, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors while driving and while the turn
indicators or hazard warning lights are operat-
ing.
Indicating
▷
▷
High-beam headlight on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlight is illuminated
when the low-beam headlight is switched
on.
High-beam headlight off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the high-
beam headlight is switched on.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
One-touch signalling
Briefly tap the lever up or down.
Wiper system
Safety information
WARNING
The duration of the one-touch signalling can
be set.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
they are folded away from the windscreen,
parts of the body may become trapped or the
vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger
of injury or material damage. Make sure that
the vehicle is switched off when the wipers
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "One-touch indicator"
6. Select the desired setting.
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
are folded away from the windscreen, and
that the windscreen wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip-
ers switch to normal speed.
If a journey is interrupted with the wiper sys-
tem switched on: when the journey is resumed,
the windscreen wipers continue operating at
the previous level.
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on dry
glass for longer periods of time. The wiper
motor may overheat. There is a risk of mate-
rial damage. Do not use the wipers when the
glass is dry.
Switching off the wiper system and
flick wiping
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper
blades to tear off and the wiper motor to
overheat. There is a risk of material damage.
Defrost the windscreen before switching on
the windscreen wipers.
Press the lever down.
▷
To switch off: press lever downwards until
position 0 is reached.
▷
To flick wipe: press the lever downwards
from position 0.
Switching on the wiper system
The lever returns to position 0 when re-
leased.
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the rain inten-
sity.
Press the lever upwards to the desired posi-
tion.
General
▷
Rest position of the windscreen wipers, po-
sition 0.
The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
▷
▷
Rain sensor, position 1.
Normal wiper speed, position 2.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip-
ers switch to intermittent operation.
▷
Fast wiper speed, position 3.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Safety information
Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sen-
sor.
NOTICE
In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently
start moving if the rain sensor is activated.
There is a risk of material damage. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
Window washer system
Safety information
WARNING
Activating the rain sensor
At low temperatures, the washer fluid can
freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visi-
bility. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems if there is no possibility
of the washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze
additive if required.
NOTICE
If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
washer pump cannot operate as intended.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
use the washer system with the washer fluid
reservoir empty.
Press the lever upwards once from position 0,
arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If there is frost, wiping may not start.
Cleaning the windscreen
Deactivating the rain sensor
Press the lever back to position 0.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
screen and the windscreen wipers are turned
on briefly.
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Windscreen washer jets
Safety information
The windscreen washer jets are automatically
heated when standby state is switched on.
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
they are folded away from the windscreen,
parts of the body may become trapped or the
vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger
of injury or material damage. Make sure that
the vehicle is switched off when the wipers
are folded away from the windscreen, and
that the windscreen wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
Rear wiper
Switching on rear wiper
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper
blades to tear off and the wiper motor to
overheat. There is a risk of material damage.
Defrost the windscreen before switching on
the windscreen wipers.
Turn the outer switch upwards.
▷
Rest position of the windscreen wiper, posi-
tion 0.
▷
Intermittent operation, arrow 1. Engaging
reverse gear activates continuous opera-
tion.
Cleaning the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷
In rest position: turn the switch downwards,
arrow 3. The switch returns to the rest posi-
tion when released.
▷
In intermittent operation: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch returns to the
intermittent position when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer fluid
filling level in the reservoir is low.
Windscreen wipers fold-out position
Principle
The wipers can be folded out from the wind-
screen in the fold-out position. This is neces-
sary for example when replacing the wiper
blades or to keep them away from the wind-
screen when there is frost.
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving
CONTROLS
Folding out the windscreen wipers
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until
the windscreen wipers stop in an approxi-
mately vertical position.
3. Lift the windscreen wipers completely away
from the windscreen.
Folding down the windscreen wipers
1. Fold the windscreen wipers fully down onto
the windscreen.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
The windscreen wipers move back to the
rest position and are operational once
again.
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
Vehicle equipment
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Overview
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Instrument cluster
Principle
Instrument cluster
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, such as speedometer, time, range,
temperature displays or indicator and warning
lights.
Indication ranges in the instrument
cluster
General
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts
to the respective drive mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g. the selector lever
indication.
The displays in the instrument cluster can
sometimes differ from the illustrations in the
Owner's Handbook.
1
Speedometer
2
Safety information
3
4
WARNING
If the displays in the instrument cluster fail,
the vehicle must not be used. There is a risk
of accident or material damage. Immediately
park the vehicle safely. If drive-ready state is
switched off and on again, the malfunction
may rectified and it is possible to continue
driving. If the malfunction cannot be rectified,
have the system checked by an authorised
5
6
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel as necessary.
7
8
3. Select the required setting using the
knurled wheel on the steering wheel.
9
Settings
Individual displays can be set individually, e.g.
a second actual speed.
Range 174
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
For further information:
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. Select the desired setting.
Indicator and warning lights, see page 159
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Live Vehicle
Operating
element
Function
Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
own vehicle with different information, e.g. ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
Display the menu bar in the in-
strument cluster.
Press the corresponding arrow
button to move the selection.
General
Depending on the driving situation, suitable
information is shown on the control display.
Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Turn the knurled wheel: scroll
the selection up or down.
Press the knurled wheel: con-
firm the selection.
Adaptive content
The following is displayed in alternating order
and, if applicable, depending on the selected
drive mode:
Configuring the layout
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout can be
individually configured and displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Static content
The following content can be displayed contin-
uously on the control display regardless of the
driving situation and set drive mode.
2. "LAYOUT"
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status.
Overview
Trip data.
xOFFROAD display.
Configuring the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, it is possible to
choose between an adaptive display and static
content.
1.
Apps menu
The head-up display displays are projected
onto the windscreen by a protective glass. The
protective glass is located between the steer-
ing wheel and the windscreen.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. Select the desired setting.
Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display in the instrument
cluster, for e.g. a reduced view.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for example
the speed.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
General
2. "HEAD-UP"
Depending on the equipment: the height of the
Head-up display can be saved with the mem-
ory function.
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel as necessary.
3. Select the required setting using the
knurled wheel on the steering wheel.
Follow the instructions on cleaning the head-
up display in the Care chapter.
Display
Turning the Head-up display on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
separately, for instance information on driver
assistance.
Overview
The following information is displayed in the
Head-up display:
1.
Apps menu
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Sport displays.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Shift Lights.
Special windscreen
The windscreen is an integral part of the sys-
tem.
Efficiency Coach.
Lists and messages.
Driver assistance systems.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
screen enable the system to function.
Some of this information is only shown briefly
when needed.
In the event of damage, have the special wind-
screen replaced by an authorised Service Part-
ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
specialist workshop.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the information shown on
the Head-up display can be affected by the
following:
▷
▷
Seat position.
Indicator and warning lights
Objects on the protective glass of the head-
up display.
Principle
▷
▷
Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
head-up display.
The indicator and warning lights in the instru-
ment cluster display the status of some func-
tions in the vehicle. The indicator and warning
lights indicate faults in monitored systems.
Dirt on the inside or outside of the wind-
screen.
▷
▷
▷
Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
Wet roads.
General
The indicator and warning lights can be illumi-
nated in various combinations and colours.
Adverse lighting conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the default set-
tings checked by an authorised Service Partner
or another qualified Service Partner or a spe-
cialist workshop.
When switching on drive-ready state, the func-
tionality of some lights is checked and they
illuminate briefly.
Red lights
Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the
Head-up display, for example for the height,
brightness or illustration. In addition, individual
displays in the Head-up display can be set up
Seat belt warning
Seat belt is not buckled.
For further information:
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Airbag system
Warning light is illuminated briefly: this
indicates that the entire airbag system
and seat belt tensioners are opera-
Pedestrian warning
Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-
sion with a person has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
tional when the vehicle is switched on.
The warning light is illuminated continuously:
there is a malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by an authorised Service
Partner or another qualified Service Partner or
a specialist workshop.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-
lision with a person is imminent. Intervene im-
mediately yourself according to the situation.
For further information:
For further information:
Warning function for pedestrians, see
Parking brake
Collision Warning
The parking brake is engaged.
For further information:
Warning light is illuminated: risk of col-
lision, for example with a vehicle. In-
creased awareness is required.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-
lision with a vehicle is imminent. Intervene im-
mediately yourself according to the situation.
Brake system
Brake pads are worn or there is a fault
in the brake system.
For further information:
Warning function in the rear-end collision sit-
The braking force assistance may be
faulty. A higher pedal force may be required
during braking.
Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected
from the right
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-
sion with crossing vehicle from the right
has been detected. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Emergency Stop Assistant
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-
lision with a crossing vehicle is imminent. In-
tervene immediately yourself according to the
situation.
For further information:
For further information:
Risk of collision
Warning function at road junctions, see
Warning light is illuminated or flashes
in conjunction with an acoustic signal if
a collision is imminent.
For further information:
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
For further information:
Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected
from left
Warning light is illuminated: risk of colli-
sion with crossing vehicle from the left
has been detected. Increased aware-
ness is required.
Yellow lights
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: col-
lision with a crossing vehicle is imminent. In-
tervene immediately yourself according to the
situation.
Anti-lock Braking System
There is a malfunction or the system
is faulty. The Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) is not available.
For further information:
Ease of steering may be restricted during full
braking.
Warning function at road junctions, see
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Distance control
Warning light flashes and an acous-
tic signal sounds: brake and perform
avoidance manoeuvre, if necessary.
For further information:
For further information:
Brake system
The brake linings are worn or there is a
fault in the brake system.
Assisted Driving Mode
Have the system checked by an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
The warning light flashes and a signal
sounds:
The system is switching off or an inter-
ruption of the system is imminent.
Assisted Driving Mode
For further information:
The warning light is illuminated and a
signal sounds: a system interruption is
imminent.
Assisted Driving Mode: hands not on
the steering wheel
The warning light flashes: a lane boundary has
been crossed.
For further information:
The warning light is illuminated and a
signal sounds:
Hands are not holding the steering
wheel. A system interruption is imminent.
Assisted Driving Mode: hands not on
the steering wheel
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
Hands are not holding the steering
wheel. System remains active.
The system may possibly not perform any
supporting steering wheel movements.
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
For further information:
Flat tyre monitor
The warning light is illuminated: the flat
tyre monitor reports a flat tyre or a tyre
pressure loss.
Reduce your speed and carefully stop the vehi-
cle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering
manoeuvres.
Front-collision warning restricted or
failed
Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version: functional limita-
tion detected, e.g. due to system limi-
tations of the camera or system failure. It is
possible to continue driving. Where applicable,
observe the information from Check Control
messages.
For further information:
Flat Tyre Monitor, see page 380.
Tyre Pressure Monitor
The warning light is illuminated: the
Tyre Pressure Monitor reports a flat
tyre or a tyre pressure loss. Note the
information in the Check Control message.
For further information:
Warning light flashes and is then illuminated
continuously: the system is unable to detect
flat tyres or tyre pressure losses.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the drive and
brake forces. The vehicle is being sta-
bilised. Reduce speed and adjust the driving
style to the road conditions.
▷
Fault due to systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: the system is auto-
matically reactivated upon leaving the field
of interference.
▷
▷
For tyres with special approval: the Tyre
Pressure Monitor was unable to complete
the reset. Reset the system again.
Warning light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability
Control has failed or is initialising. The driving
stabilisation is restricted or has failed.
Wheel without wheel electronics is fitted: if
necessary have it checked by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
If the warning light is continuously illuminated,
have the system checked immediately by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
▷
Malfunction: have the system checked by
an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
For further information:
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
or Dynamic Traction Control activated
For further information:
Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 373.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or Dynamic Traction Control is activa-
ted.
Steering system
The steering system may be faulty.
For further information:
Have the system checked by an au-
thorised Service Partner or another
▷
▷
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop.
Rear fog light
Rear fog light is switched on.
For further information:
For further information:
Engine warning light
Acoustic protection for pedestrians
Engine malfunction.
Acoustic protection for pedestrians has
failed. Increased caution when ma-
noeuvring.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ised Service Partner or another quali-
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
In case of repeated malfunctions, have the
system checked by an authorised Service Part-
ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
specialist workshop.
For further information:
Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 405.
For further information:
Lane Departure Warning
Acoustic protection for pedestrians, see
page 138
Depending on equipment and national-
market version:
Warning light is illuminated: functional
limitation detected, for example, due to low
sun or system failure. It is possible to continue
driving. Where applicable, observe the infor-
mation from Check Control messages.
Green lights
Turn indicators
The turn indicator is switched on.
Warning light flashes: a warning is issued ac-
tively. The system does not carry out any
steering interventions.
If the indicator light flashes more rap-
idly than usual, a turn indicator bulb
has failed.
For further information:
For further information:
Lane change warning restricted or
failed
Side lights
The side lights are switched on.
For further information:
Depending on equipment and national-
market version:
Side light, low-beam headlight, see
Functional limitation detected, e.g. due
to dirty radar sensors or the system has failed.
It is possible to continue driving. Where ap-
plicable, observe the information from Check
Control messages.
Low-beam headlight
The low-beam headlight is switched
on.
For further information:
For further information:
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
High-beam Assistant
Low-beam headlight is switched on
and the High-beam Assistant is activa-
ted.
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
against rolling away
The high-beam headlight is switched on and
off automatically according to traffic situation.
The vehicle is automatically secured
against rolling away after stopping.
For further information:
For further information:
Lane Departure Warning
Manual Speed Limiter
Depending on equipment and national-
market version:
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
switched on.
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
switched on. A lane marking has been detec-
ted on at least one side of the vehicle. The sys-
tem is ready to intervene and issue warnings.
Indicator light flashes: set speed limit is
exceeded.
For further information:
The system can perform steering interven-
tions.
Cruise Control
Indicator light flashes: the system actively is-
sues a warning. If necessary, the system per-
forms a steering intervention.
The system is active.
For further information:
For further information:
Distance control
Lane Change Warning
Indicator light illuminates: system has
detected a vehicle ahead. The vehicle
symbol goes out if no vehicle in front is
detected.
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: the system
is switched on. Warnings are issued
within the system limits and, if necessary,
steering interventions are carried out.
Indicator light flashing: vehicle in front has
driven off.
For further information:
For further information:
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Speed Limit Assist
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been adopted, a
green tick is displayed.
Automatic Hold is ready to operate.
The vehicle is held automatically when
at a standstill.
For further information:
For further information:
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode
Grey lights
The system is helping the driver keep
the vehicle in driving lane.
Manual Speed Limiter
For further information:
The system is interrupted.
For further information:
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
progress
Cruise Control
Green arrow symbol for lane-chang-
ing: the system is carrying out a lane
change.
The system is interrupted.
For further information:
For further information:
Distance control
Lane Change Assistant Lane: lane
change not possible
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
interrupted.
Grey line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: the system has detected
the lane change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Indicator light flashes: the requirements
for operation of the system are no longer being
met. The system has been deactivated but will
continue to brake until you actively take over
by depressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
For further information:
For further information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Assisted Driving Mode
For further information:
System is on standby and does not
make any steering wheel movement.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see
The system activates automatically
when all operating requirements are met.
For further information:
Blue lights
High-beam headlight
The high-beam headlight has been
switched on.
Front-collision warning switched off
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: the system is
switched off.
For further information:
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
For further information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Lane Departure Warning
The system can be activated.
For further information:
Depending on equipment and national-
market version:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see
Warning light is illuminated: the system
is switched off or automatically deactivated, for
example, because DSC OFF is activated.
Warning light flashes: a warning is issued ac-
tively. The system does not carry out any
steering interventions.
Check Control
Principle
For further information:
Check Control monitors vehicle functions and
alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys-
tems.
Lane change warning restricted
General
Depending on equipment and national-
market version:
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
applicable, in the Head-up display.
The system is switched on. No warn-
ings are issued temporarily. At least one func-
tional requirement has not been met, for ex-
ample the minimum speed has not been
reached.
An acoustic signal may also be output and a
text message shown on the control display.
For further information:
Hiding Check Control messages
An arrow symbol next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
Lane change warning switched off
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: the system is
switched off.
To hide Check Control messages, press
the left arrow button on the steering
wheel.
For further information:
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
permanently and remain until the fault has
been repaired. If a number of malfunctions
have occurred at the same time, the messages
are displayed in succession.
White lights
Cruise Control with distance control
No display of distance control as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages may be temporarily hidden. After ap-
For further information:
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
prox. 8 seconds, these messages are auto-
matically displayed again.
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the required text message.
6. Select the desired setting.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are automati-
cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds.
The Check Control messages remain stored
and can be displayed again.
Messages displayed at the end of the
journey
Certain messages displayed when driving are
displayed again when drive-ready state is
switched off.
Displaying saved Check Control
messages
1.
Apps menu
Selection lists
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
Principle
4. "Check Control"
The instrument cluster or the Head-up display
can show lists for certain functions and can be
used for operation where applicable.
5. Select the required text message.
Display
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
Recent calls list.
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or saved.
If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on
the control display.
Text messages
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
Text messages and an icon in the instrument
cluster explain what a Check Control message
means and what the indicator and warning
lights signify.
Operating
elements
Function
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, for example the cause
of the fault and any action required, can be
called up via Check Control.
Turn the knurled wheel: dis-
play the entertainment list or
scroll up or down in the list.
With urgent text messages, the added text will
be automatically displayed on the control dis-
play.
Press the knurled wheel: con-
firm the selection.
Press the corresponding arrow
button to change the enter-
tainment source.
It is possible to select additional assistance de-
pending on the Check Control message.
1.
Apps menu
To display the last calls list.
2. "Vehicle apps"
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Display
Example Description
In permanent manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
With shift paddles: Sport pro-
gramme.
An example:
Switching instruction.
To change the track or entertainment source
after calling up the entertainment list, use the
arrow keys on the steering wheel. Press the
knurled wheel to confirm the selection.
For further information:
Shift paddles, see page 144
Turn the knurled wheel up or down to select
the desired entry in the list. Press the knurled
wheel to confirm the selection.
Power display
Depending on the equipment, the list in the
instrument cluster may differ from the figure.
Principle
The power display indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
Optimum shift indicator
Activating/deactivating power
display
Depending on the selected drive mode or the
individually configured layout, the power dis-
play or revolution counter is displayed.
Principle
The optimum shift indicator recommends the
gear that best suits the current driving situa-
tion. The use of the optimal gear supports an
efficient driving style.
Display
General
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version, the optimum shift indicator is
active in manual mode M.
Displays
Information on upshifting, downshifting or the
engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
For vehicles without optimum shift indicator,
the gear engaged is shown.
Needle in the arrow 1 area: display of the en-
ergy recuperation achieved, for example during
deceleration, CHARGE.
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Needle in the area of arrow 2: drive power as a
percentage, POWER.
The display of the revolution counter is varia-
ble and depends on the selected drive mode.
Reduced speed range
Reduced drive power
The available drive power may be reduced due
to certain factors. The power display is auto-
matically adjusted as necessary.
The available speed range may be reduced
due certain factors, example a cold drivetrain.
The revolution counter display is automatically
adjusted depending on the available speed
range.
In addition, icons on the power display and
in the revolution counter indicate if the drive
power has been reduced.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
Icon
Description
Blue icon: cold drive system.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for example
due to long-lasting or high
power requirements when driv-
ing uphill.
OFF is shown in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Depending on equipment and
national-market version:
READY is shown in the instru-
ment cluster. The Automatic
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Restriction of drive power set
by BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
For further information:
▷
▷
A Check Control message will
be shown as necessary.
Automatic Start/Stop function, see
Revolution counter
Engine temperature
General
Display
It is vital to avoid rotational speeds in the red
warning zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is
interrupted to protect the engine.
▷
Cold engine: the needle is in
the blue temperature range,
close to the limit position
of the temperature display
and the WARM-UP text is
displayed.
Activating/deactivating the
revolution counter
The revolution counter is displayed depending
on the selected drive mode or the individually
configured layout.
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Drive at moderate rotational
speed and vehicle speed.
or in the Head-up display in combination with
the revolution counter.
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle
is located in the centre or left half of the
temperature display.
Operating requirements
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. A Check Control message is
also displayed.
▷
Advanced mode must be enabled.
For further information:
For further information:
Display
Coolant level, see page 401.
Outside temperature
General
If the display drops to +3 ℃, 37 ℉ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is shown.
There is an increased risk of black ice.
Yellow fields illuminate successively to indicate
when a gearshift is due.
Safety information
▷
▷
Shift gear at the latest when all fields light
up red.
WARNING
When the maximum engine speed is
reached, the entire display flashes red and
the fuel supply is limited to protect the en-
gine.
Even at temperatures above +3 ℃, 37 ℉
there may be an increased risk of black ice,
for example on bridges or on shaded sec-
tions of road. There is a risk of accident. At
low temperatures, adjust driving style to the
weather conditions.
Central display area
Displayable content
The following settings can be selected:
Shift Lights
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced view.
Principle
Shift Lights indicate the suitable upshift point
at which fast acceleration values can be ach-
ieved.
Route preview of the navigation system.
Map view of the navigation system.
General
The Shift Lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed in the instrument cluster
Entertainment.
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Augmented View.
Trip data
Depending on the equipment, Augmented
View in the instrument cluster enables the
visualisation of driver assistance systems in
the real vehicle environment.
Principle
The display of trip data provides various infor-
mation about the trip, e.g. the average con-
sumption or the trip distance.
Grey lines indicate the recommended mini-
mum distance to the vehicle in front when
Cruise Control is deactivated.
General
Android Auto©.
The trip data can be shown on the control dis-
play and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, selected functions of a
compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, for example, map views.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or
continuously on the control display.
Some contents for the central display area can
also be configured as a view in the Head-up
display.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
For further information:
Display on the control display
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Communication, see page 6.
General
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
Configuring the central display area
The contents for the central indication range in
the instrument cluster can be individually con-
figured, for example, the display of trip data.
▷
▷
Set interval for displaying the trip data.
Average fuel consumption as a function
of the set interval.
▷
▷
▷
Driving time depending on the set inter-
val.
1.
Press the button on the steering
Distance covered, depending on the set
interval.
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
The distance covered in the coasting
drive state.
2. "CONTENT"
Displaying trip data continuously
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel as necessary.
1.
Apps menu
3. Select the required setting using the
knurled wheel on the steering wheel.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Journey data"
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
Configuring the trip data display
The intervals for displaying the trip data in the
instrument cluster and on the control display
can be configured.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for journey data"
5. "Values"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Since start of journey ( )": the values
are reset automatically if the vehicle is
at a standstill for approximately four
hours.
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.
Average consumption, arrow 2.
Distance covered depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
▷
"Since last refuel ( )": the values are re-
set automatically after refuelling with a
significant amount of fuel.
This icon is displayed when the vehicle
is in coasting driving condition.
▷
▷
"Since factory": the values since leaving
the factory are displayed.
▷
Total kilometres, arrow 4.
"Since Individual ( )": the values since
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Current consumption
The display of the current consumption allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.
for driving economically and in an environmen-
tally friendly manner.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time:
Mild hybrid technology: depending on the
equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted when
driving slowly or even when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the engine continues to run. In this
case, the combustion engine is electrically op-
erated.
"Since Individual ( )"
Use the key on the left steering column lever:
1. Press the key.
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on the setting of the intervals for dis-
playing the trip data.
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
The trip data is displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
2. Press and hold the button until the values
are reset.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
General
3. "System settings"
The Assisted View display can be configured in
the central indication range and displayed.
4. "Time period for journey data"
5. "Reset Individual"
For further information:
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
Display
"Since Individual ( )"
Assisted View
Principle
With Assisted View, information on driver as-
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
An example with active driver assistance: the
indicator and warning lights for the distance
control and the Lane Change Assistant indi-
cate a lane change to the next lane. At the
same time, the lane change to the next lane is
shown with animation in the Assisted View.
Information on parking and manoeuvring is
displayed in Assisted View whenever Park As-
sist is enabled.
System limits
The detection capability of the system is limi-
ted.
Only objects detected by the system are taken
into account.
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
For further information:
4. "Date and time"
▷
▷
5. Select the desired settings.
Fuel level indicator
G-Meter
Principle
The current filling level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
General
The G-Meter shows the longitudinal and lat-
eral forces acting on the vehicle occupants
during a journey.
General
The vehicle inclination may cause the display
to fluctuate.
The display can be configured in the central
indication range of the instrument cluster.
For further information:
Refuelling, see page 360.
The values are automatically reset after each
start of the journey.
For further information:
Display
An arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side
of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is
located.
Manually resetting G-Meter values
1. Display G-Meter in the instrument cluster.
2. Press and hold the knurled wheel
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value.
on the steering wheel until the val-
ues are reset.
Range
Date and time
Principle
The range shows what distance can be cov-
ered with the amount of fuel currently in the
tank.
Various settings can be configured for the dis-
play of date and time, for example the date
format.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set and
the automatic time setting can be activated.
The automatic time setting automatically up-
dates the time, date and, if necessary, the time
zone.
General
The estimated range available with the re-
maining fuel is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed briefly if
the remaining range is low. A small remaining
range means that the engine functions are not
always ensured if a sporty driving style is em-
ployed, e.g. when cornering fast.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
If the range drops below approximately 50 km,
30 miles the Check Control message is dis-
played continuously.
Displaying the vehicle status
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
Safety information
Overview
NOTICE
If the range drops below 50 km, approx.
30 miles, the engine may no longer be sup-
plied with sufficient fuel. The engine functions
are no longer ensured. There is a risk of ma-
terial damage. Refuel in good time.
Icon
Description
"Flat Tyre Monitor": Status of
the Flat Tyre Monitor, see
page 380.
"Tyre Pressure Monitor": sta-
tus of the Tyre Pressure Mon-
itor, see page 373.
Display
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value on the fuel
level indicator.
"Engine oil level": Electronic oil
measurement, see page 398.
"AdBlue": BMW Diesel
with BluePerformance, see
page 394.
"Check Control": to display
saved Check Control mes-
Selecting the units of
measurement
"Service requirements": to dis-
play service requirements, see
Depending on the national-market version, it
is possible to select the units of measurement
for various values, for example, consumption,
distances and temperature.
1.
Apps menu
Current driving condition
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
General
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
5. Select the desired setting.
The following states can be displayed:
Vehicle status
▷
▷
Driving.
Coasting driving condition: "EFFICIENT
COASTING".
General
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems, such as for Check
Control.
▷
"CHARGING BATTERY"
With mild hybrid technology:
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation.
Operating requirements
Depending on the situation, additional in-
formation on adaptive recuperation may be
displayed.
▷
SPORT drive mode is selected.
▷
The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle: "Adaptive content"
Efficient coasting with the engine switched
off.
Display
For further information:
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, see page 355.
Coasting, see page 356.
The following information is displayed:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.
Operating requirements
Power.
▷
COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode is se-
lected.
Charging pressure.
Engine oil temperature.
▷
The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle: "Adaptive content"
Service requirements
Display
Principle
The function shows the current service require-
ments and related maintenance jobs.
General
After switching on, the next service appoint-
ment or the distance remaining until your next
servicing is displayed briefly on the instrument
cluster if necessary.
An example:
The current service requirements can be read
out from the vehicle key by a service advisor.
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle is decelerating, arrow 2.
Display
More detailed information on the maintenance
work required can be displayed on the control
display.
Sport displays
1.
Apps menu
Principle
The sport displays primarily assist a sporty
driving style.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Service requirements"
Maintenance routines and any statutory in-
spections required are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Displays
CONTROLS
Icons
Entering deadlines
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
Icon
Description
Maintenance has been carried
out on time.
Ensure that the date and time are set correctly
in the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
Maintenance has been carried
out later than scheduled.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
Maintenance has not been car-
ried out.
4. "Service requirements"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.
Service history
Principle
Completed maintenance work can be dis-
played on the control display.
General
Have maintenance work carried out by an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The
maintenance work carried out is entered in the
vehicle data. The function is available as soon
as a maintenance visit has been logged in the
vehicle data.
Displays
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Service requirements"
Essential maintenance routines and any
statutory inspections required are dis-
played.
5. "Service history"
6. Select an entry to display more detailed in-
formation.
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
Lights
Functions via iDrive
Vehicle equipment
Icon
Function
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Automatic driving lights control.
Low-beam headlight.
Side lights.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Lights and lighting
Exterior lights off.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon
Function
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lights.
Home lights.
Icon
Function
Automatic driving lights
control
Exterior lights menu.
Principle
Automatic driving lights control.
Low-beam headlight.
Exterior lights off.
Depending on ambient brightness, the system
switches the low-beam headlight on or off au-
tomatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight
and in rain or snow.
Rear fog light.
General
The headlights may also be switched on when
the sun is low against a blue sky.
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
If the low-beam headlight is switched on man-
ually, the automatic driving lights control is de-
activated.
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Side light"
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
Activating the automatic driving
lights control
The vehicle is illuminated all round.
Press the button on the light switch.
Do not leave the side lights on for extended
periods of time, as this could drain the vehicle
battery and it may no longer be possible to
switch on drive-ready state.
The LED in the button illuminates.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low-
beam headlight is switched on.
Switching off the side lights
The side lights can be switched off as follows:
System limits
The automatic driving lights control is no sub-
stitute for using your own judgement to assess
the light conditions.
▷
Press and hold the
light switch.
button on the
▷
▷
Switch off the lights via iDrive.
Switch on drive-ready state.
The sensors are unable to recognise fog or
hazy weather, for example. In such situations,
switch on the lights manually.
After switching on drive-ready state, the
automatic driving lights control is activated.
Low-beam headlight
Side lights, low-beam
headlights,
Switching on the low-beam headlight
Press the button on the light switch.
General
The low-beam headlight illuminates if drive-
ready state is switched on.
If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready
state is switched off, the exterior lights are
switched off automatically after a given time.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
Side lights
To switch on the low-beam headlight as soon
as the standby state is switched on, press the
button again.
General
The side lights can only be switched on in the
low speed range.
Switching off the low-beam headlight
Switching on the side lights
Depending on the national-market version, the
low-beam headlight may be switched off in the
low speed range:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
▷
▷
Press and hold the
light switch.
button on the
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
Switch off the lights via iDrive.
Welcome Light Carpet
Welcome light
Principle
With the welcome light, the exterior lights are
automatically turned on for a limited time when
approaching or unlocking the vehicle.
General
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lights of the vehicle can be individually adjus-
ted.
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
1.
Apps menu
Home lights
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
Principle
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
With the home lights, the exterior lights are
automatically turned on for a limited time after
leaving the vehicle in order to illuminate the
area around the vehicle.
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
desired setting:
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
Switching on the home lights
▷
After switching off drive-ready state, press
the turn indicator lever forwards briefly.
▷
"BMW Iconic Glow"
The radiator grille lighting settings are
only available while at a standstill and
with drive-ready state switched off.
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approximately 1 second.
Turning on the welcome light
Activate the home lights function for the button
of the vehicle key:
▷
Automatically on approach.
▷
During unlocking.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷
With the vehicle locked, press the
button on the vehicle key.
3. "Doors and windows"
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
4. "Vehicle key"
Adaptive lighting functions
5. Select the desired setting.
Principle
Setting the duration
Adaptive lighting functions makes it possible to
illuminate the road responsively.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
General
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Home lights"
The adaptive lighting functions consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment:
6. Select the desired setting.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Adaptive Headlights.
Variable light distribution.
Cornering light.
Daytime driving lights
Roundabout light.
General
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Activating the adaptive light
functions
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the rear
daytime driving lights are switched on.
Press the button on the light switch.
The LED in the button illuminates.
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
compulsory, in which case the daytime driving
lights cannot be deactivated at the front.
Adaptive Headlights
1.
Apps menu
General
2. "Vehicle apps"
The high-beam headlight follows the road
ahead in response to the steering wheel angle
and other parameters.
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on equipment or national-mar-
ket version:
Anticipatory Adaptive Headlights
The high-beam headlight is adapted to the di-
rection of travel ahead even before entering or
leaving a bend.
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"
"Rear daytime driving lights"
"BMW Iconic Glow"
S-bend lights
The high-beam headlight is kept as straight as
possible when driving around S-bends.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
Variable light distribution
Roundabout light
Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the
cornering light is activated on both sides. The
edge of the road is illuminated more effec-
tively. Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the
cornering light is switched off again on both
sides.
Principle
The variable light distribution enables better
illumination of the road.
General
The light distribution is adjusted automatically
depending on speed and navigation data, if
necessary.
Adaptive headlight range
control
Urban lights
Adaptive headlight range control compensates
for acceleration and braking manoeuvres and
vehicle load conditions to prevent oncoming
vehicles from being dazzled.
The light beam from the low-beam headlight is
extended at the sides.
Motorway beam pattern
The range of the low-beam headlight is in-
creased.
High-beam Assistant
Principle
Cornering light
High-beam Assistant detects other road users
in good time and activates or deactivates the
high-beam according to traffic situation.
Principle
When turning off or on tight bends, for example
hairpin bends, up to a certain speed, a corner-
ing light is added to illuminate the inside area
of the bend.
General
High-beam Assistant ensures that the high-
beam headlight is switched on when the traffic
situation allows. The system does not switch
on the high-beam headlight at low speed
range.
General
The cornering light is switched on automati-
cally depending on the steering wheel angle or,
where applicable, activation of the turn indica-
tors.
The system responds to the lights of oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.
When reversing, the cornering light is activated
automatically irrespective of the steering wheel
angle.
The high-beam headlight can be switched on
and off manually at any time.
If equipped with Selective Beam, the high-
beam headlight is not switched off for oncom-
ing vehicles or vehicles driving ahead of you.
Instead, the system masks only those areas
of the beam which would otherwise dazzle on-
coming traffic or traffic driving ahead. In this
Hairpin lights
The cornering light is also switched on before
entering hairpin bends.
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
case, the blue indicator light continues to illu-
minate.
Deactivating High-beam Assistant
Depending on the equipment: if the headlights
have been converted, High-beam Assistant
may only function to a restricted extent.
For further information:
Operating requirements
▷
Automatic driving lights control is activated.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
▷
The low-beam headlight is switched on.
Activating High-beam Assistant
System limits
High-beam Assistant cannot replace the driv-
er's own judgement as to when to use the
high-beam headlight. Therefore activate the
dipped headlights manually if the situation re-
quires it.
In the following situations, the system will not
operate or its operation will be restricted and
your intervention may be required:
▷
In extremely adverse weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
▷
When detecting poorly lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horse riders or car-
riages and when trains or ships are close to
the road, or when animals are crossing the
road.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low-
beam headlight is switched on.
The system will switch automatically between
low-beam headlight and high-beam headlight.
▷
On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows
of hills, when there is crossing traffic or if
the view of oncoming vehicles on a motor-
way is partly obstructed.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates if the high-
beam headlight is switched on by the
system.
▷
▷
In poorly lit towns or where there are highly
reflective signs.
If a journey is interrupted with High-beam As-
sistant activated: when the journey is resumed,
High-beam Assistant remains activated.
If the area of windscreen in front of the in-
terior mirror is covered with condensation,
dirt, stickers, labels, etc.
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated by
switching the high-beams on and off manually.
To reactivate High-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn indicator lever.
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
cle's country of registration, you will need to
prevent the dazzling effect of your headlights.
Fog light
Rear fog light
Converting the headlights
1.
Apps menu
Operating requirements
The low-beam headlight must be switched on
before the rear fog light can be activated.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Right/left-hand traffic"
6. Select the desired setting.
Switching the rear fog light on/off
Press the key.
Depending on the national-market version,
the parking brake must be applied.
The yellow indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the rear
fog light is switched on.
System limits
The availability of the High-beam Assistant
might be restricted.
If automatic driving lights control has been
activated, the low-beam headlight switches
on automatically when the rear fog light is
switched on.
The availability of the adaptive lighting func-
tions might be restricted.
Instrument lighting
Bad weather light
Principle
Operating requirements
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-
ness and with turned on side light or low-beam
headlight.
The bad weather light provides optimised illu-
mination of the road when visibility conditions
are poor, for example in fog or rain. The light
distribution from the low-beam headlight is
adapted to the visibility conditions.
Adjusting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
Activating/deactivating the bad
weather light
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
The bad weather light is activated when the
automatic driving light system or the rear fog
light is switched on.
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"
5. Select the desired setting.
Left-hand/right-hand traffic
Interior lighting
General
General
When driving in countries where vehicles drive
on the opposite side of the road to your vehi-
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, the footwell lights, door entry lighting,
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
ambient lighting and loudspeaker lighting are
controlled automatically.
Depending on the equipment, there are read-
ing lights located at the front and in the rear
beside the interior lights.
Overview
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
5. Tap the desired seat.
Ambient lighting
Reading lights
Interior lights
General
Depending on the equipment, the lighting for
some of the interior lights can be adjusted.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
Switching interior lights on/off
Using the button:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Press the key.
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
To switch off permanently: press and hold the
button for approximately 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear can be switched
on and off independently. The button is loca-
ted on the headliner in the rear.
Turning ambient lighting on/off
The ambient lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
If the ambient lighting was deactivated using
iDrive, it is not switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
Selecting the colour
5.
Tap the icon.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Switching reading lights on/off
Using the button:
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Colour"
Press the key.
6. Select the desired setting.
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Lights
CONTROLS
Adjusting the brightness
Loudspeaker lighting
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Principle
3. "Interior lighting"
Some loudspeakers in the vehicle are illumina-
ted.
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Brightness"
General
6. Select the desired setting.
When the loudspeakers are muted, the loud-
speaker lighting turns off. When the ambient
lighting effects are activated, the loudspeakers
light up white.
Dynamic light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls
or detected obstacles when doors are open,
are indicated by light effects. If the ambient
light is deactivated, the light effects are still
displayed.
Turning loudspeaker lighting on/off
The loudspeaker lighting is switched on when
the vehicle is unlocked and switched off when
the vehicle is locked.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Lighting events"
6. Select the desired setting.
Reduced for journey at night
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or
the sun protection is closed, the lighting is
switched off.
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Vehicle equipment
For further information:
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
3
4
Head airbag
Side airbag
2
Front airbag, front passenger
Depending on the national-market version:
Front airbags
In a side-on crash, the side airbag in the rear
protects the bodies of the vehicle occupants in
the outer rear seats in the side chest and pelvic
area.
Front airbags protect the driver and front pas-
senger in the event of a head-on collision
where the protection of the seat belts alone
would no longer be sufficient.
Head airbag
Side airbag
The head airbag protects the head in the event
of a side-on crash.
In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the
side of the body in the chest and pelvic area.
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Do not glue the airbag covers and do not
cover or modify them in any way.
Protective effect
General
Do not use the front airbag cover on the
passenger's side as a tray.
Airbags are not activated in every collision sit-
uation, for example, in minor accidents.
Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front seats that are not
specifically suited for seats with integrated
airbag versions.
Information for optimum airbag
protective effect
▷
▷
Do not hang items of clothing, for example
coats or jackets, over the backrests.
WARNING
Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to the covers of the
steering wheel, the dashboard and seats.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy-
ment area of the airbag is restricted, the air-
bag system cannot provide the intended level
of protection or may cause additional injuries
when it deploys. There is a danger of injury or
danger to life. Observe the following for opti-
mum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷
Do not dismantle the airbag system.
Even if all this information is observed, injuries
resulting from contact with the airbag cannot
be entirely ruled out in every situation.
The noise caused by the deployment of an
airbag may lead to temporary hearing loss in
vehicle occupants sensitive to noise.
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Always grip the steering wheel at the steer-
ing wheel rim. Place your hands in the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to mini-
mise the risk of injury to hands or arms
when the airbag deploys.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
▷
Adjust the seat and steering wheel so the
driver can reach over the steering wheel di-
agonally. Select the settings so that, when
reaching over, the shoulders stay in contact
with the backrest and the upper body stays
as far away from the steering wheel as
possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components of the airbag system
may be hot after airbag deployment. There
is a danger of injury. Do not touch individual
components.
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
WARNING
▷
▷
▷
Make sure that vehicle occupants keep
their head away from the side airbag.
Work carried out incorrectly can cause the
airbag system to fail, malfunction or deploy
accidentally. If there is a malfunction, the air-
bag system might not deploy as intended
in an accident, even if the impact is of the
appropriate severity. There is a danger of in-
jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system
tested, repaired or removed and disposed of
Do not place any other persons, pets or ob-
jects between the airbags and occupants.
Keep the dashboard and windscreen area
on the passenger's side clear, for example
do not attach adhesive foil or covers and
do not fit brackets for navigation devices or
mobile phones, for example.
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
by an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop.
General
The availability of the function depends on the
vehicle equipment and country.
The front passenger airbag can be deactiva-
ted and reactivated via iDrive on the control
display. An indicator light shows the operating
status.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly to indicate
that the entire airbag system and the seat belt
tensioners are operational.
Operating requirements
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
Malfunction
▷
The warning light does not illu-
minate after drive-ready state is
switched on.
Deactivating the front passenger
airbag
1.
Apps menu
▷
The warning light is permanently illumina-
ted.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Have the system checked by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
3. "Passenger airbag"
4. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
5. Check the operation of the front passenger
airbag using the indicator light and confirm.
Adjusting the front seat position
The front passenger airbag is deactivated. The
driver airbag remains active.
To maintain the accuracy of the seat position,
calibrate the electric front seats as soon as
a corresponding message is displayed on the
control display.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is
removed from the front passenger seat, reacti-
vate the front passenger airbag so that it can
deploy as intended in the event of an accident.
For further information:
Activating the front passenger
airbag
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Passenger airbag"
4. "PASSENGER AIR BAG ON"
Principle
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the
front passenger airbag can be deactivated via
iDrive.
5. Check the operation of the front passenger
airbag using the indicator light and confirm.
The front passenger airbag is reactivated and
deploys in appropriate situations.
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Front passenger airbag indicator
light
Safety information
The indicator light for the front passenger air-
bag in the headliner shows the operating sta-
tus of the front passenger airbag.
WARNING
The system may trigger inadvertently if con-
tact is made with individual components of
the hinges and bonnet locks. There is a dan-
ger of injury or material damage. Do not
touch individual components of the hinges
and bonnet locks.
After switching on standby state, the light illu-
minates briefly and then shows whether the
airbag is activated or deactivated.
Display
Function
When the front passenger air-
bag is activated, the indicator
light illuminates for approx. 1
minute and then goes out.
WARNING
Modifications to the pedestrian protection
can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci-
dental triggering of the pedestrian protection
system. There is a danger of injury or danger
to life. Do not modify the pedestrian protec-
tion, its individual components or its wiring.
Do not dismantle the system.
When the front passenger air-
bag is deactivated, the indica-
tor light remains illuminated.
Check the status of the indicator light before
and also while driving when the front passen-
ger seat is occupied.
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a
failure, malfunction or accidental triggering of
the system. If there is a malfunction, the sys-
tem might not trigger as intended in an acci-
dent, even if the impact is of the appropriate
severity. There is a danger of injury or danger
to life. Have the system tested, repaired or
removed and disposed of by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
Active pedestrian protection
Principle
The active pedestrian protection raises the
bonnet if the front of the vehicle collides with
a pedestrian.
General
When triggered, the pedestrian protection cre-
ates deformation space underneath the bon-
net in readiness for the subsequent head
impact. Sensors underneath the bumper are
used for detection.
WARNING
If the system has been triggered or is dam-
aged, its functionality will be restricted or it
may no longer work at all. There is a danger
of injury or danger to life.
The system’s gas pressure springs are only
approved for a certain period of time. Check
the gas pressure springs during maintenance
and replace them as necessary.
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
If the system has been triggered or is dam-
aged, have it checked and replaced at an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Collision warning systems
General
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
different systems that can help prevent an im-
minent collision.
NOTICE
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Opening the bonnet when the pedestrian
protection has triggered may damage the
bonnet or the pedestrian protection. There is
a risk of material damage. Do not open the
bonnet after the Check Control message is
displayed. Have it checked by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
System limits
The active pedestrian protection is only
triggered at speeds between approximately
30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph.
Safety information
For safety reasons, the system may also trig-
ger in rare instances where impact with a pe-
destrian cannot be excluded beyond all doubt,
for example in the following situations:
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
▷
Collision with objects such as a skip or a
boundary post.
▷
▷
▷
Collision with animals.
Stone impact.
Driving into a snow drift.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown.
WARNING
The system has been triggered or is
faulty.
Displays and warnings do not relieve you
of your personal responsibility. System limits
can mean that warnings or system respon-
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Immediately drive at moderate speed to an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop to
have the system checked and repaired.
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
The system only takes into account objects
within the detection range of the installed sen-
sors and that are detected by the system.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
Depending on the national-market version,
some of the systems are automatically active
after every driving off.
Depending on the equipment, the area is
monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
For this reason, the system may fail to respond
or only respond after a delay.
The following functions are adjustable.
1.
Apps menu
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.
Front-collision warning
Resetting settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings for vehicle
delivery.
Principle
The front-collision warning can help prevent
accidents. If an accident cannot be avoided,
the system may help reduce the severity of the
accident.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and may activate the brakes
independently.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"
General
Depending on the equipment version, the
front-collision warning system includes the
following functions:
System limits
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
Safety information
Warning function for oncoming traffic, see
WARNING
Due to system limitations, the system may
not respond at all, or may respond too late,
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Observe the in-
formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
Warning function for turning with oncoming
Warning function for pedestrians, see
Warning function at road junctions, see
Detection capability
The detection capability of the system is limi-
ted.
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety information
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
5 km/h/3 mph.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
As soon as the speed drops below these val-
ues again, the system is activated.
Turning the front-collision warning
on/off
Switching on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every driv-
ing off.
WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you
of your personal responsibility. System limits
can mean that warnings or system respon-
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Switching the system on manually
The system is activated when the warning
time is set.
For further information:
Switching the system off manually
Depending on the national-market version, the
setting can only be made at a vehicle standstill
or in the very low speed range.
WARNING
Individual functions may malfunction when
tow-starting or towing away with activa-
ted front-collision warning or Cruise Control
switched on. There is a risk of accident. Turn
off the front-collision warning and Cruise
Control before tow-starting or towing away.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Front collision warning"
7. "Off"
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Front radar sensor.
Side radar sensors, front.
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Setting the warning time
Icon
Meaning
1.
Apps menu
Risk of collision, for example, with a
pedestrian.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
Risk of collision, for example, with an
oncoming or a vehicle driving in front.
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Front collision warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Risk of collision, e.g. with a crossing
vehicle from the right.
The higher the sensitivity of the warning time
settings the more warnings are displayed. The
system may therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
Risk of collision, e.g. with a crossing
vehicle from the left.
General risk of collision.
The system checks for visual impairments. De-
pending on equipment, the Driver Attention
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the
driver's gaze behaviour. Visibility conditions
and field of vision also affect the timing of the
warnings.
The display of the respective indicator light
and warning light may vary because the sys-
tem may detect multiple objects.
Display in the instrument cluster
Warning function
The front-collision warning warns on different
warning levels, depending on the respective
hazardous situation.
The following indicator lights and warning
lights are shown in the instrument cluster and,
depending on the equipment, in the Head-up
display:
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
Icon
Meaning
Depending on equipment and na-
tional-market version:
▷
▷
▷
▷
A red warning light is illuminated:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Functional limitation detected, for ex-
ample, due to system limits of the
cameras or system failure. It is pos-
sible to continue driving. Where appli-
cable, observe the information from
Check Control messages.
A red warning light flashes:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene your-
self immediately.
A warning signal sounds:
System limits of the cameras, see
There is a risk of collision. Intervene your-
self immediately.
Depending on equipment and na-
tional-market version:
Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of an imminent danger of collision,
the system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
The system is switched off.
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete standstill.
The system only takes into account objects
within the detection range of the installed sen-
sors and that are detected by the system.
When the brake pedal is pressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake force of the vehicle
is used.
Depending on the equipment, the area is
monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
For this reason, the system may fail to respond
or only respond after a delay.
Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a
standstill.
In the event of automatic brake intervention,
Dynamic Stability Control may be activated au-
tomatically.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
A brake intervention can be cancelled by suf-
ficiently stepping on the accelerator pedal, re-
leasing the brake pedal or with an active steer-
ing wheel movement.
▷
▷
In tight bends.
With restriction of the driving stability con-
trol systems.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Depending on the equipment and situation,
the brake intervention can occur at speeds of
up to approx. 250 km/h/155 mph.
At speeds above approx. 210 km/h/130 mph,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
Warning function in rear-end
collision situations
System limits
Principle
Safety information
The warning function in rear-end collision sit-
uations warns of a possible risk of collision and
may brake independently.
WARNING
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
Due to system limitations, the system may
not respond at all, or may respond too late,
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Observe the in-
formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
Detection capability
The detection capability of the system is limi-
ted.
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
General
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
▷
▷
▷
Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-
proached at high speed.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of these warn-
ings may vary depending on the current driving
situation.
Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
heavily.
Vehicles with unusual rear design.
The driver’s own driving behaviour is taken
into account in the responses of the system.
If an active driving style is detected, warnings
and brake interventions are output less fre-
quently.
Warning function for
oncoming traffic
Principle
The Warning function for oncoming traffic can
issue a warning of a possible risk of collision
with oncoming vehicles and apply the brakes
independently, if needed.
Safety information
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
General
Icon
Meaning
Collision Warning with a detected ve-
hicle.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
For further information:
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of these warn-
ings may vary depending on the current driving
situation.
Warning function for turning
with oncoming traffic
Principle
There is a risk of an accident with oncoming
vehicles when turning across the oncoming
lane. The system can issue a warning of a
possible risk of collision and may activate the
brakes independently.
Safety information
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
General
Icon
Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
In case of a risk of collision, a brake interven-
tion is triggered.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds
from approx. 5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of
these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation.
For further information:
System limits
Safety information
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Meaning
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
Icon
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
General
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally.
For further information:
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range on a straight line.
System limits
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range when turning off.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with pedestrians at speeds above
approx. 5 km/h/3 mph.
Upper speed limit
The system is active when the own speed is
below approx. 25 km/h/15 mph.
Safety information
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Warning function for
pedestrians
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
person, a warning light is displayed.
Principle
The warning function for pedestrians warns
of the risk of collision with pedestrians and cy-
clists at speeds that are common in towns and
cities. The system may brake automatically if
necessary.
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Upper speed limit
Icon
Meaning
Depending on the equipment, the system re-
acts to pedestrians when your own speed is up
to 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
General risk of collision.
Warning function at road
junctions
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally.
Principle
The warning function at road junctions can
warn of a possible risk of collision with crossing
traffic at intersections and junctions at speeds
that are common in towns and cities. The sys-
tem may brake automatically if necessary.
For further information:
System limits
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
General
Detection range
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Vehicles that cross the vehicle's direction of
travel can be detected by the system as soon
as these vehicles enter the detection range of
the sensors.
The detection range consists of the following
parts:
▷
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.
With side radar sensors in front: side areas,
arrows 2.
A warning is given at road junctions and cross-
roads if there is a risk of collision with crossing
traffic.
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 5 km/h/3 mph.
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
The timing of these warnings may vary de-
pending on the current driving situation.
▷
Pedestrians with insufficient height.
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Upper speed limit
Safety information
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when your own speed is below approx.
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Evasion Assistant
Icon
Meaning
Principle
Risk of collision with crossing vehicle
from right.
The Evasion Assistant can support the driver
in making evasive manoeuvres in certain situa-
tions, for example, when obstacles or persons
suddenly appear.
Risk of collision with crossing vehicle
from left.
General
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally.
For further information:
The system issues warnings and intervenes to
provide support if there is a possibility to take
an avoidance manoeuvre to the side.
System limits
General
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in
front of the vehicle. Depending on the equip-
ment, the areas next to the vehicle are also
monitored.
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
The system uses a detected free space for
avoidance by safely supporting the avoidance
manoeuvre carried out by the driver with auto-
matic steering movements.
▷
Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings,
for example.
Safety information
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions.
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-
proached at high speed.
Operating requirements
▷
Front-collision warning is active.
Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
heavily.
▷
Sensors detect adequate space around the
vehicle.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear design.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or person, a warning light is displayed.
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
Icon
Meaning
▷
Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Warning when a vehicle is detected.
Exit warning
Warning when a person is detected.
Warning for unknown obstacles.
Principle
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.
The system can warn the passengers when
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-
sion with approaching objects is detected.
Warning function with evasion
support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
General
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system provides support for the driver's
avoidance manoeuvres if there is a risk of colli-
sion.
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-
play signals the evasion support.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
System limits
Depending on the equipment, the area in front
of the vehicle is also monitored. For this pur-
pose, two further radar sensors are located in
the front bumper.
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
The system monitors the area around the ve-
hicle for a limited time after getting in or after
parking.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-
ous warning functions.
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Sensors
7. "Warning tone"
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Displays
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.
Warning light in the exterior mirror
Depending on the equipment: side radar
sensors, front.
Turning the exit warning on/off
Switching on the system automatically
The exit warning activates automatically after
departure if the function was turned on at the
end of the last journey.
Switching the system off manually
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
7. "Off"
Ambient lighting
Depending on the equipment, warnings are
also indicated by the ambient lighting in the
interior.
Warning function
Adjusting the exit warning
Advance warning
1.
Apps menu
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror is illuminated.
Depending on the equipment, the ambient
lighting also flashes.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
An object was detected in the opening range.
Increased awareness is required.
Acute warning
7. Select the desired setting.
In the event of an acute warning, the warning
light in the exterior mirror flashes and, depend-
ing on the equipment, the ambient lighting also
flashes. An acoustic signal also sounds.
Switching the warning signal on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
There is a risk of collision when opening the
doors.
General
System limits
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detec-
ted:
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.
Stationary or very slow objects.
Pedestrians.
The system issues a warning starting at a min-
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel is vibrating.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
The system does not issue a warning if the
driver indicates in the corresponding direction
before leaving the driving lane.
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too
fast or too slow.
Safety information
▷
▷
In curves.
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the layout of
the road and the traffic situation. There is a
risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to
the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic sit-
uation and intervene actively if the situation
warrants it. In the event of a warning, do
not move the steering wheel unnecessarily
abruptly.
Lane Departure Warning
with active return
Principle
The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning
if the vehicle leaves the road or its driving lane.
An automatic steering intervention may help in
keeping the vehicle in its lane.
WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you
of your personal responsibility. System limits
can mean that warnings or system respon-
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane departure warning"
7. "Off"
Operating requirements
The lane marking must be detected by the
camera in order for the Lane Departure Warn-
ing to be active.
Setting the Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
Sensors
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane departure warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Front radar sensor.
▷
"Expanded"
Side radar sensor, front.
Side radar sensor, rear.
If the system detects that the vehicle is
about to leave the lane or cross a lane
marking, a warning is issued. The sys-
tem performs a steering intervention.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
▷
"In dangerous situations"
If the lane marking is interrupted: if driv-
ing over the lane is detected as uninten-
tional or the radar sensors detect an on-
coming vehicle, a warning is issued and
steering intervention is carried out.
Switching on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every driv-
ing off.
If the lane markings are solid, depend-
ing on the national-market version: if the
system detects that the vehicle is unin-
tentionally leaving the lane or crossing a
lane marking, a warning is issued and a
steering intervention is performed.
Switching the system on manually
The system is activated when the warning
time is set.
For further information:
Adjusting the strength of the steering
wheel vibration
Switching the system off manually
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the switch-off must be con-
firmed successively on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
1.
Apps menu
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
6. "Vibration intensity"
Icon
Meaning
7. Select the desired setting.
The warning light is illuminated yel-
low: functional limitation detected, for
example, due to low sun or system
failure. It is possible to continue driv-
ing. Where applicable, observe the
information from Check Control mes-
sages.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: switch steering intervention
on/off
1.
Apps menu
The warning light flashes yellow: a
warning is issued actively. The sys-
tem does not carry out any steering
interventions.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane departure warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
The warning light is illuminated grey:
the system is switched off or auto-
matically deactivated, for example,
because DSC OFF is activated.
Depending on the national-market version,
steering intervention is automatically active
whenever you drive off.
The warning light flashes grey: a
warning is issued actively. The sys-
tem does not carry out any steering
interventions.
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, different system statuses are
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
Icon
Meaning
For further information:
The indicator light is illuminated
green: the system is switched on. A
lane marking has been detected on
at least one side of the vehicle. The
system is ready to intervene and is-
sue warnings. The system can per-
form steering interventions.
Warning function
When leaving the driving lane
If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a
lane boundary is detected, the steering wheel
vibrates depending on the steering wheel vi-
bration setting.
The indicator light flashes green: the
system actively issues a warning. If
necessary, the system performs a
steering intervention.
In addition, the indicator light flashes
green.
If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre-
sponding direction before changing lanes, no
warning is issued.
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Steering intervention
In trailer operation
Depending on the national-market version and
equipment: if a lane boundary is crossed in the
speed range up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph,
the system may respond with an active steer-
ing intervention in addition to the steering
wheel vibration. The system is helping the
driver keep the vehicle in driving lane. Steering
intervention can be felt at the steering wheel,
and can be overridden manually at any time.
If the trailer socket is occupied or the trailer
operation is activated, for example during op-
eration with a trailer, no steering intervention
takes place.
When a bicycle carrier or load carrier is used
on the trailer tow hitch, this limitation does
not apply when trailer operation is activated
accordingly on the control display.
For further information:
When steering intervention is active,
the indicator light flashes green.
Towing a trailer, see page 348.
Cancellation of the warning
For example, the warning or an active steering
intervention is cancelled in the following situa-
tions:
For example, steering intervention is sup-
pressed in the following situations:
▷
If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak-
ing heavily.
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
On returning to the correct lane.
▷
▷
On indicating.
If the hazard warning lights are switched
on.
If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak-
ing heavily.
▷
▷
▷
▷
In driving situations with high driving dy-
namics.
▷
If the hazard warning lights are switched
on.
When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
ing the driving stability.
▷
▷
On indicating.
When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
ing the driving stability.
While Dynamic Stability Control is restric-
ted.
▷
Directly after a steering intervention by the
vehicle systems.
Directly after a steering intervention by the
vehicle systems.
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.
Warning signal
Possibly when another driver assistance
system is activated.
Depending on the national-market version: in
the event of multiple active steering interven-
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
out the driver's intervention at the steering
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
vention. A longer warning signal sounds from
the third steering intervention onwards.
▷
▷
No lane boundary detected.
When the system limits are reached.
System limits
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
A Check Control message is also displayed.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
General
▷
When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane
boundaries, for example, in areas where
there are roadworks.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The system is operational after a minimum
speed has been reached and uses radar sen-
sors to monitor the area behind and adjacent
to the vehicle.
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Lane Change Warning menu.
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
The system indicates when vehicles are in the
blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from
the rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror is illumina-
ted at a dimmed level.
When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
ing the driving stability.
While Dynamic Stability Control is restric-
ted.
In the previously named situations, the system
will warn prior to a lane change. The warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
A Check Control message may be displayed
if functionality is restricted. Depending on the
national-market version, a yellow warning light
is also illuminated.
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
20 km/h, approx. 12 mph, the steering wheel
will not vibrate.
Lane Change Warning with
active return
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Principle
Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the
blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
Sensors
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
in different stages.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Side radar sensors, rear.
An automatic steering intervention may help in
keeping the vehicle in its lane.
Depending on the equipment: side radar
sensors, front.
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Depending on the national-market
version: switch steering intervention
on/off
Operating requirements
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
1.
Apps menu
Turning the Lane Change Warning
on/off
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
1.
Apps menu
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane change warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane change warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, different system statuses are
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Adjusting the Lane Change Warning
Icon
Meaning
Setting the warning time
The indicator light is illuminated
green: the system is switched on.
Warnings are issued within the sys-
tem limits and, if necessary, steering
interventions are carried out.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane change warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
The warning light is illuminated grey:
the system is switched on. No warn-
ings are issued temporarily. At least
one functional requirement has not
been met, for example the minimum
speed has not been reached.
Adjusting the strength of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
The warning light is illuminated yel-
low: functional limitation detected, for
example, due to dirty radar sensors
or system failure. It is possible to
continue driving. Where applicable,
observe the information from Check
Control messages.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The indicator light is illuminated grey:
the system is switched off.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version: if
there is no response to the steering wheel vi-
brations and a lane boundary is crossed at
speeds of up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph,
the system responds with an active steering
intervention if necessary. The steering inter-
vention helps to return the vehicle to its driving
lane. Steering intervention can be felt at the
steering wheel, and can be overridden man-
ually at any time.
For further information:
Warning function
Warning light in the exterior mirror
The steering intervention is carried out from
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display.
Brief flashing of the warning light
Brief flashing of the warning light in exterior
mirror during vehicle unlocking serves as sys-
tem self-test.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision.
System limits
Advance warning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in the blind spot or
are approaching from the rear.
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Acute warning
Upper speed limit
In the event of an acute warning, the steering
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the
exterior mirror flashes brightly.
The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
The system is activated again at speeds under
approx. 250 km/h, approx. 155 mph.
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
Warning displays
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
Depending on the selected setting for warn-
ings, for example the warning time, it is pos-
sible that more or fewer warnings will be
displayed. As a result, there may also be an in-
creased number of premature warnings about
critical situations.
Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
Depending on the system setting when the
turn indicator is turned on.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
The speed of the approaching vehicle is
much faster than your own speed.
General
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention may be restricted, for ex-
ample in the following situations:
▷
When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane
boundaries, for example, in areas where
there are roadworks.
Radar sensors monitor the area adjacent to
the vehicle from a minimum speed up to ap-
proximately , 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed on the control display.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the
vehicle – and there is a risk of a side collision
– the system helps the driver to avoid a col-
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating
steering wheel. An active steering intervention
is performed by the system if necessary.
▷
If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead.
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
if functionality is restricted. Depending on the
national-market version, a yellow warning light
is also illuminated.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
The system may be restricted or inactive when
the trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer
operation is activated, for example, when oper-
ating with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check
Control message is shown.
Operating requirements
The camera behind the windscreen detects the
position of the lane boundaries.
The lane boundaries must be detected by the
camera in order for the side collision warning
with steering intervention to be active.
Side collision warning
Sensors
Principle
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
The side collision warning helps to avoid an
imminent side collision.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Turning the side-collision warning
on/off
Warning function
Warning light in the exterior mirror
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Side collision warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the strength of the
steering wheel vibration
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version, an
active steering intervention takes place if nec-
essary to prevent a collision and keep the vehi-
cle in its own lane. Steering intervention can be
felt at the steering wheel, and can be overrid-
den manually at any time.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
For further information:
System limits
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
boundaries, for example, in areas where
there are roadworks.
▷
▷
The hazard warning lights are switched on
if appropriate.
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
PreCrash functions are triggered if appro-
priate.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
▷
▷
If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead.
Sensors
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
The system is controlled via the radar sensors
at the side in the rear.
A Check Control message may be displayed if
functionality is restricted.
Switching Rear Collision Prevention
on/off
The system is automatically activated at the
start of each journey.
The system is inactive when the trailer socket
is occupied or when the trailer operation is
activated, for example, when operating with a
trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check Control mes-
sage is shown.
The system is deactivated in the following sit-
uations:
Rear Collision Prevention
▷
▷
When reversing.
If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer op-
eration is activated, for example when op-
erating with a trailer or bicycle carrier.
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Rear Collision Prevention can
respond to vehicles approaching from behind.
System limits
General
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Functional limitations
The function may be restricted if the speed of
the approaching vehicle is much higher or sim-
ilar to the own speed.
Road Priority Warning
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
Principle
If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a
relevant speed, the system can respond as fol-
lows:
The Road Priority Warning provides support
in situations where road signs or traffic lights
indicate that the driver must give way.
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
General
Sensors
The system uses a camera behind the wind-
screen to evaluate the road signs and traffic
lights.
The system is controlled by the camera behind
the windscreen.
Turning the Road Priority Warning
on/off
The navigation system forwards information
regarding the road layout to the system.
A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to
be violated in the following traffic situations, for
example:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At a road junction.
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Give way warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
At a T-junction.
On an entry slip road slip road.
At a roundabout.
In the event of a red traffic light.
Starting from a variable minimum speed, the
system issues warnings from and up to ap-
proximately 80 km/h/50 mph.
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
The following road signs are taken into ac-
count for the Road Priority Warning:
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Give way warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Signs Meaning
Give way signs:
An advance warning is issued for
these road signs.
The selected setting is saved and adopted for
the next journey.
Stop signs.
An advance warning and an acute
warning are issued for these road
signs.
Warning function
General
The system warns in two stages:
Red traffic lights result in output of an
advance warning and an acute warn-
ing.
▷
▷
Advance warning: visually by means of an
icon in the instrument cluster.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Acute warning: visually by means of an icon
in the instrument cluster and with an addi-
tional acoustic signal.
The timing of the warnings may vary depend-
ing on the current driving situation and the set
warning time.
Operating requirements
The road priority situation must be unambig-
uously directed by road signs or light signal
systems.
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Advance warning
System limits
If there is a risk that road priority is about to be
ignored, one of the following icons appears in
the instrument cluster:
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
Icon
Meaning
Give way.
No Warning
The system provides no warning in situations
such as the following:
Stop.
▷
▷
In road priority situations without “Give
Way” signs, “Stop” signs or red light signal
systems.
Red traffic light.
At road junctions with relevant traffic lights
that illuminate yellow or green.
When an advance warning is issued, intervene
as appropriate for the situation; for example,
by braking.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
Acute warning
If there is an imminent risk that right-of-way is
about to be ignored, an acoustic signal sounds
and one of the following icons appears in the
instrument cluster:
If road signs or light signal systems are fully
or partially concealed or soiled.
If road signs or light signal systems are dif-
ficult to read or rotated.
Icon
Meaning
If road signs or light signal systems are too
small or too large.
Stop.
With road signs that do not correspond to
the standard.
Red traffic light.
If road signs are detected that apply to a
merging or parallel road.
If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
When an acute warning is issued, immediately
intervene as appropriate for the situation; for
example, by braking.
At road junctions with flashing light signal
systems.
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Display in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the warning is
displayed in the Head-up display at the same
time as in the instrument cluster.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
The system may not be available or may
only be available to a limited extent is some
countries.
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the
Head-up display.
Wrong-way Warning
Principle
The Wrong-way Warning issues a warning if
the driver is about to drive the wrong way, for
example on motorways, roundabouts and one-
way streets.
System limits
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
General
Depending on the equipment, the system will
check the traffic situation based on navigation
data and road signs.
No Warning
The system provides no warning if the road
layout is not indicated by road signs, for exam-
ple.
The system will take into account road signs
such as the following:
▷
▷
▷
No entry.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality,
or give no Wrong-way Warning at all, in situa-
tions such as the following:
Roundabout.
Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
“Collision warning systems”.
▷
▷
If the road signs are ambiguous.
If the road signs are fully or partially cov-
ered or soiled.
▷
If the road signs are poorly visible or twis-
ted.
Operating requirements
The road layout ahead must be unambigu-
ously indicated by road signs.
▷
▷
If the road signs are too small or too large.
With road signs that do not correspond to
the standard.
Sensors
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs are detected that apply to a
merging or parallel road.
The system is controlled by the camera behind
the windscreen.
If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
Turning Wrong-way Warning on/off
Depending on the national-market version, the
Wrong-way Warning is automatically activated
after each start of the journey.
Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
It may not be possible to use the system in
all countries.
Warning function
A warning is displayed and an acoustic
signal sounds, for example when the
vehicle is travelling in the wrong direc-
tion on a motorway, roundabout or one-way
street.
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be ac-
tivated via voice input.
Emergency Stop Assistant
For further information:
Principle
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.
An immediate emergency call can be triggered
on the control display.
The following is performed automatically when
the Emergency Stop Assistant is activated:
General
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated au-
tomatically.
▷
A display is shown in the instrument clus-
ter.
If the system is activated, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill within its own lane by
means of lane tracking.
▷
The system takes control of the vehicle until
the vehicle comes to a standstill.
▷
▷
The hazard warning lights are switched on.
Safety information
Depending on the equipment, an emer-
gency call is triggered at standstill.
WARNING
Activating/deactivating the
Emergency Stop Assistant
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess your physical
condition correctly. Increasing inattention or
fatigue might not be detected, or may not be
detected in good time. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Emergency stop"
7. Select the desired setting.
Operating requirements
▷
▷
▷
Emergency Stop Assistant is activated via
iDrive.
Cancelling the Emergency Stop
Assistant
At any time during the process, the driver can
cancel the Emergency Stop Assistant function
by actively taking control of the vehicle.
The function is activated from a speed of
approx. 70 km/h, approx. 43 mph.
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver
activity.
For example, the system is cancelled in the
following situations:
Activating the Emergency Stop
Assistant
If the system detects that the driver is no lon-
ger driving the vehicle safely or is ignoring
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is ac-
tivated automatically. The activated system is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong countersteering.
On indicating.
If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
When the hazard warning lights are
switched off.
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If the system is interrupted on the control
display.
General
When changing the selector lever position,
if the vehicle was already at a standstill.
When the vehicle is at a standstill
As soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the
system configures the following settings:
▷
The vehicle is secured to prevent it from
rolling away.
The area behind to the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on.
The central locking system is unlocked.
Depending on the equipment, the area in front
of the vehicle is also monitored.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The system indicates when other road users
are approaching.
Icon
Status
In case of a risk of collision when driving in re-
verse, the system will provide assistance with
an automatic brake intervention.
Emergency Stop Assistant has trig-
gered.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
System limits
The system cannot replace the abilities of a
safe driver.
Safety information
The Emergency Stop Assistant may have re-
stricted functionality in situations such as the
following:
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
▷
If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by
the steering wheel.
▷
If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high
protection against infrared light.
Crossing-traffic Warning
with brake function
Principle
At blind exits or when leaving bay parking
spaces, the Crossing-traffic Warning detects
other road users approaching from the side
earlier than is possible from the driver's seat.
Sensors
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.
Warning function
Depending on the equipment: side radar
sensors, front.
General
The control display shows the corresponding
image, an acoustic signal may sound, and the
warning light in the exterior mirror flashes.
Activating/deactivating Crossing-
traffic Warning
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display, which will be
closed after a brief period of time.
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Crossing-traffic Warning and
brake intervention to switch on automatically.
1.
Apps menu
Visual warning
2. "Vehicle apps"
Warning light in the exterior mirror
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "CROSSING-TRAFFIC WARNING"
7. Select the desired setting.
Turning on the Crossing-traffic
Warning automatically
The system must be activated on the control
display. As soon as Park Distance Control or a
camera view is active and a selector lever po-
sition is engaged, the system is automatically
switched on.
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if other vehicles are detected by the rear sen-
sors when the vehicle is reversing.
The system is switched on at the rear when
reverse gear is engaged.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a drive position is engaged.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the Crossing-traffic
Warning automatically
The system is automatically turned off, for ex-
ample, in the following situations:
In the Park Distance Control view, the relevant
boundary area flashes red if the sensors detect
vehicles.
▷
▷
If walking speed is exceeded.
When a certain distance covered is excee-
ded.
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Display in the camera image
▷
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer
operation is activated, the Crossing-traffic
Warning is not available for the area behind
the vehicle.
Dynamic brake lights
Principle
Depending on the direction of travel, the view
to the front or rear is displayed in the camera
image.
The brake lights flash to warn road users be-
hind the vehicle that emergency braking is be-
ing performed.
The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red if the sensors detect
vehicles.
General
Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of
your vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, an acoustic
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the
acoustic signal will already sound when the
drive position is engaged.
▷
▷
Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.
Heavy braking: brake lights flash.
Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill,
the hazard warning lights are activated.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
To switch off the hazard warning lights:
▷
▷
Accelerate.
Press the hazard warning lights button.
Functional limitations
The function can be restricted, for example, in
the following situations:
BMW Drive Recorder
▷
▷
In tight bends.
Principle
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
The BMW Drive Recorder saves short video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings in order
to document the traffic situation, for example.
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
General
Operating requirements
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷
Automatic saving of recordings.
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Privacy Policy has been accepted.
Recording type was selected.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the
corresponding recording type set.
Recording duration was selected.
▷
Manual saving of recordings.
Theft notification:
The function makes it possible to document
traffic situations with the correspondingly
set recording type.
▷
The theft notification was activated in the
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-
corder menu.
The cameras of the assistance systems are
used for recording, e.g. panorama view.
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
In addition, the following journey parameters
are saved:
▷
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.
Time.
Privacy Policy has been accepted.
Speed.
GPS coordinates.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before using the recording function for the first
time.
Data protection
The reliability of the recording and the use of
video recordings depend on the legal regula-
tions in the country where the system is to be
used. The user is responsible for the use of the
system and for complying with the provisions
that apply in each case.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept data protection policy.
5. "Settings"
Before using for the first time, the vehicle man-
ufacturer recommends checking that there are
no legal or official restrictions on using the sys-
tem in the state or country in question. Addi-
tionally, the legality of using the system should
be checked at regular intervals, especially if the
vehicle frequently crosses borders.
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
Recording functions
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
of the system. Information about the system
must also be provided if the vehicle is passed
on to anyone else.
Automatic recording
The recording is automatically saved when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.
▷
In case of accident:
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after the save function
was triggered.
Playing and managing recordings
Saved video recordings can be played, expor-
ted and deleted.
▷
In case of theft:
For your own safety, the video recording is
only shown on the control display if the speed
is below approximately 3 km/h, 2 mph. In the
case of some national-market versions, the
video recording is only shown with the parking
brake applied or with the selector lever in posi-
tion P.
Depending on the selected recording dura-
tion setting, the system saves the recording
after it has been triggered.
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-
sage is sent to the My BMW App.
After saving the recording, a video in re-
duced quality can be downloaded to a mo-
bile device.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may occur.
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
5. Select the desired recording.
6. If necessary, select camera.
Manual recording
Using the button
Settings
Recording type
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Press and hold the button.
Recording duration
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Via iDrive
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
Recording on a mobile device
Principle
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
Depending on the equipment, video recordings
can be stored directly on a mobile device, for
example a smartphone or USB storage.
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after the save function was
triggered.
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
General
System limits
The length of the video that can be stored de-
pends on the available memory capacity on
the mobile device.
In the event of a serious accident, recordings
may not be saved if, for example, the damage
to the vehicle is too extensive or the power
supply was interrupted.
Operating requirements
In the case of USB drives that have been over-
written multiple times, there may be limitations
when exporting recordings.
▷
Privacy Policy has been accepted.
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-
tomatically when the alarm system has been
triggered.
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:
▷
Depending on the equipment version, a
mobile device is connected to the vehicle
via Wi-Fi and Bluetooth audio or a USB
storage device is connected.
Theft notification and video download may be
restricted or unavailable if the Internet connec-
tion is weak or missing.
▷
▷
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
Active Protection
Principle
Recording
In critical situations, Active Protection prepares
the passengers and the vehicle for a potential
imminent accident.
The recording can be started and stopped
manually.
Start the recording:
General
1.
Apps menu
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
different PreCrash functions.
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
The system detects critical driving situations
which could potentially lead to an accident.
Such critical driving situations include:
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
▷
▷
▷
Full braking.
Cameras
Different cameras can be selected.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
1.
Apps menu
Certain functions of some systems installed in
the vehicle can – within the system limits –
cause Active Protection to trigger:
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
▷
▷
▷
Front-collision warning: automatic brake in-
tervention.
5. "Cam. selection"
6. Select the desired camera.
Front-collision warning: brake power assis-
tance.
Rear Collision Prevention: detects impend-
ing rear collisions.
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety information
PostCrash – iBrake
WARNING
Principle
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility. System limits may mean
that critical situations are not detected relia-
bly or in good time. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
In certain accident situations, PostCrash iBrake
can automatically bring the vehicle to a stand-
still without the driver having to intervene.
General
PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of an-
other collision and its consequences.
At a standstill
Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake
is released automatically.
Function
Depending on the equipment, the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat belt straps are auto-
matically tightened once after driving off, if the
seat belt is fastened.
Decelerating the vehicle harder
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a standstill more quickly
than is possible with automatic braking.
Depending on the equipment and require-
ments, in critical accident situations, the
following individual functions become active as
required:
To do so, brake quickly and firmly. This will
briefly increase the brake pressure to a higher
level than that achieved with the automatic
brake function. Automatic braking is interrup-
ted.
▷
Automatic pre-tensioning of the front seat
belts.
▷
The windows are automatically closed.
The windows remain open by a gap.
▷
▷
Automatic closing of the glass sunroof/pan-
oramic glass sunroof.
Cancelling automatic braking
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
cancel automatic braking, for example if an
avoidance manoeuvre is required.
The sun protection is also closed.
Automatic positioning of the backrest of the
front passenger seat.
Cancel automatic braking:
If the critical driving situation passes without
an accident occurring, the tension in the front
seat belts is slackened again. If the belt ten-
sion does not slacken automatically, stop the
vehicle and unfasten the seat belt by pressing
the red button on the seat belt buckle. Fasten
the seat belt again before continuing driving.
All other systems can be restored to the de-
sired setting.
▷
▷
By depressing the brake pedal.
By depressing the accelerator pedal.
Attentiveness Assistant
Principle
The Attentiveness Assistant can detect de-
creasing attentiveness or the onset of fatigue
in the driver on long monotonous journeys,
for example on motorways. The system rec-
ommends taking a break.
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
6. "Attentiveness Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
WARNING
Display
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess your physical
condition correctly. Increasing inattention or
fatigue might not be detected, or may not be
detected in good time. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
If the driver shows signs of decreasing atten-
tiveness or of fatigue, a note is shown on the
control display with the recommendation to
take a break.
The following settings can be selected during
the display.
The system is reset approximately 45 minutes
after the vehicle is stopped. A break recom-
mendation can only be displayed again after
this time has elapsed.
Function
The system is switched on every time drive-
ready state is switched on.
System limits
Once the journey has started, the system
adapts to the driver so that any decrease in
attention or fatigue can be detected.
The function of the system may be restricted. If
the function is restricted, no warning or a false
warning is issued. The system may have re-
stricted functionality in the following situations:
This process takes into account the following
criteria, for example:
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for example steering.
When the speed is predominantly below
approx. 65 km/h, 40 mph.
Driving conditions, for example time of day,
duration of journey.
▷
▷
If a sporty driving style is adopted, for ex-
ample sharp acceleration or fast cornering.
▷
Depending on the equipment: attentive-
ness of the driver through the Driver Atten-
tion Camera.
In active driving situations, for example fre-
quent lane changes.
The system is active from approx. 65 km/h,
40 mph and can also display a recommenda-
tion to take a break.
▷
▷
In poor road condition.
In strong crosswinds.
Break recommendation
Driver Attention Camera
Setting break recommendations
Break recommendation can also be switched
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Principle
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver activity and, depending on the equip-
ment, the driver's direction of view.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
General
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
For support by assistance systems, the atten-
tion of the driver is analysed by evaluating the
head position and eye opening of the driver.
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Safety
CONTROLS
To guarantee full functionality, ensure that the
Driver Attention Camera has an unobstructed
field of view.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster has up to three infrared light sources.
Depending on the light conditions, these light
sources can be visible when the vehicle is in
the standby state.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may have re-
stricted functionality in situations such as the
following:
▷
If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by
the steering wheel.
▷
If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high
protection against infrared light.
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
Brake Assist
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
When the brake pedal is pressed quickly,
Brake Assist automatically provides the max-
imum possible braking force assistance. This
keeps the stopping distance as short as pos-
sible in full braking situations. This takes full
advantage of the Anti-lock Braking System.
For further information:
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
during full braking.
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Anti-lock Braking System
Dynamic Stability Control
Principle
The Anti-lock Braking System prevents the
wheels from locking during braking.
Principle
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep
the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
drive power and by brake intervention on indi-
vidual wheels.
Steering control is retained even during full
braking, which enhances active road safety.
General
General
The Anti-lock Braking System is ready when-
ever you switch on drive-ready state.
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for example:
▷
Loss of traction at the rear which can lead
to oversteering.
Malfunction
The warning light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
▷
Loss of grip at the front wheels which can
lead to understeering.
A Check Control message is shown.
Safety information
▷
▷
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is not
available.
WARNING
The ease of steering is restricted in the
event of full braking.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Deactivating/activating the system
1.
Press the button to open the selec-
tion.
WARNING
2. "DSC OFF"
When driving with a roof load, for example
with roof bars, the higher centre of gravity
can mean that driving safety is no longer
guaranteed in critical driving situations. There
is a risk of accident or material damage.
Driving with roof load only with activated Dy-
namic Stability Control.
The Dynamic Stability Control is deactiva-
ted.
3.
Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Overview
Display when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
Button in the vehicle
Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Warning light pulsates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control is regulating the driving
power and brake forces. The vehicle is
being stabilised. Decrease speed and adjust
driving style to the road conditions.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light is illuminated: Dynamic
Stability Control has failed or is initial-
ising. The driving stabilisation is restric-
ted or has failed.
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
If the warning light is continuously illuminated,
have the system checked immediately by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
General
After switching on drive-ready state, Dynamic
Stability Control is activated automatically.
Driving stability during acceleration and cor-
nering is restricted if Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
Automatic programme change
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-
tomatically by the front-collision warning, de-
pending on the situation. Deactivate the front-
collision warning if necessary.
To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-
namic Stability Control as soon as possible.
For further information:
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Traction Control
Dynamic Traction Control
Principle
1.
Press the button to open the selec-
Dynamic Traction Control is a drive-optimised
variant of Dynamic Stability Control.
tion.
2. "Traction": Dynamic Stability Control is acti-
vated.
In special road conditions, for example on un-
cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose sur-
faces, the system ensures maximum drive, but
with restricted driving stability.
3.
Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
General
Maximum traction is provided when Dynamic
Traction Control is activated. Driving stability is
restricted when accelerating and cornering.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display when Dynamic Traction
Control is activated.
Activating Dynamic Traction Control briefly
may be useful in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Traction Control is activated.
When driving off in deep snow or on a loose
surface.
When driving with snow chains.
Automatic programme change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
is activated automatically:
Overview
Button in the vehicle
▷
▷
When the distance control is activated.
In case of a brake intervention by the front-
collision warning. Deactivate the front-colli-
sion warning if necessary.
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.
In the event of a flat tyre.
For further information:
Dynamic Stability Control
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the vehicle's all-wheel drive
system. The interaction of BMW xDrive and
other suspension control systems, for exam-
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
ple, Dynamic Stability Control, further optimi-
ses traction and driving dynamics.
Hill Descent Control
Principle
General
Hill Descent Control provides assistance when
descending hills by regulating vehicle speed
on steep downhill gradients, for example when
driving off-road.
BMW xDrive distributes the driving power var-
iably to the front and rear axles according to
the driving situation and road condition.
The xOffroad package also adapts the all-
wheel drive system to the applicable xOFF-
ROAD driving mode.
General
When the system is active, the vehicle moves
at a speed set by the driver without the brake
pedal having to be pressed.
Display on the control display
In the Live Vehicle menu, information about
BMW xDrive can be displayed under the
following view:
While Hill Descent Control regulates vehicle
speed, the system automatically distributes
brake force to the individual wheels. Driving
stability and ease of steering are improved.
If required, the Anti-lock Braking System pre-
vents the wheels from locking.
"xVIEW"
The following information is displayed:
▷
▷
Distribution of drive torques to wheels.
Hill Descent Control can be activated below
approx. 40 km/h, approx. 25 mph.
Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-
cent.
Speeds between approx. 3 km/h, approx.
2 mph and approx. 30 km/h, approx. 20 mph
can be set. When driving downhill, the system
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
physical limits.
▷
▷
▷
Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.
Graphic of the wheel angle.
With navigation system: elevation at current
position.
▷
Self-levelling suspension of the two-axle
ride level control.
Hill Descent Control provides support when
driving in selector lever positions D, N and R.
For further information:
Overview
Button in the vehicle
M Sport differential
The M Sport differential actively and steplessly
locks the rear axle differential according to the
driving situation. This prevents an individual
rear wheel from spinning, thus providing opti-
mum traction in all driving situations.
It is the driver's responsibility to adopt a driving
style that is appropriate to the situation.
Hill Descent Control
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating Hill Descent
Control
Increasing or reducing speed
Using the Cruise Control rocker switch
To activate the system
The set speed can be changed using the
Cruise Control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
Press the key.
Speeds between approx. 3 km/h,
2 mph and approx. 30 km/h, 20 mph
are adopted as the set speed.
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the
speed, the following functions are deactivated:
▷
▷
The front-collision warning.
The emergency braking function of Active
Park Distance Control.
For further information:
▷
▷
Press the rocker switch upwards: the speed
is increased in increments.
▷
▷
Press the rocker switch upwards and hold it
there: the speed increases while the rocker
switch is pressed.
Deactivating the system
Press the button again.
▷
▷
Press the rocker switch downwards: the
speed is decreased in increments.
The system is automatically disabled
at speeds above approx. 40 km/h, ap-
prox. 25 mph.
Press the rocker switch downwards and
hold it there: the speed decreases while the
rocker switch is pressed.
Display in the instrument cluster
With the brake pedal
While the Hill Descent Control regulates vehicle
speed, the set speed can be reduced by press-
ing the brake pedal.
An icon and the selected set
speed are displayed.
▷
Display green: Hill Descent
Control is active. The system
brakes the vehicle.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, a message ap-
pears in the instrument cluster.
▷
Display grey: Hill Descent Control is ready.
Display in the Head-up display
The status of Hill Descent Control can also be
displayed in the Head-up display.
Integral Active Steering
Principle
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-
noeuvrability of the vehicle and makes a more
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-
bility is also increased at high speeds.
The steering system may be faulty. The Inte-
gral Active Steering support may no longer be
provided.
General
▷
▷
▷
Larger steering movements are required at
low speeds.
The Integral Active Steering is a combination
of the variable steering gear ratio of the front
axle and the active rear-wheel steering.
The response of the vehicle is more sensi-
tive in higher speed ranges.
The rear-wheel steering increases manoeu-
vrability at low speeds by turning the rear
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the
front wheels.
Drive cautiously and think well ahead.
Have the system checked by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. The re-
sulting benefits include smooth lane changes.
In critical driving situations, Integral Active
Steering can stabilise the vehicle by automat-
ically steering the rear wheels, for example
when oversteering.
Setting
The system offers various settings.
With the drive modes of the Driving Experience
Control, the system can be set to comfortable
or dynamic.
For further information:
Operation with snow chains
In order to guarantee freedom of movement of
the wheels when operating with snow chains,
rear-wheel steering must be turned off when
snow chains are mounted.
For further information:
Rear-wheel steering with snow chains, see
page 373.
Malfunction
The warning light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
A Check Control message is shown.
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
5. "Safety and warnings"
Vehicle equipment
6. "Speed warning"
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
7. "Warning above:"
8. Select the desired setting.
Setting the current speed as the
speed limit warning
For further information:
1.
Apps menu
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Adopt current speed"
Speed limit warning
Principle
The speed limit warning can be used to set a
speed limit. A warning will be issued when this
speed limit is exceeded.
Speed Limit Display with
no-overtaking indicator
General
The warning is repeated if the set speed limit
is exceeded again after dropping below it by
5 km/h/3 mph.
Speed Limit Info
Principle
Activating/deactivating the speed
limit warning
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display and possibly
supplementary signs.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
General
The camera located near the interior mirror de-
tects road signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead signs.
Depending on the national-market version,
road signs with supplementary signs, for ex-
ample, for wet road conditions, are taken into
account and compared with the vehicle's on-
board data, for example, the windscreen wiper
signal. The road sign and associated supple-
mentary signs are then displayed in the instru-
Setting the speed
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
ment cluster and the Head-up display, if appli-
cable, or ignored, depending on the situation.
Some supplementary signs are taken into ac-
count in the speed limit evaluation, but are not
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷
In countries where overtaking restrictions
are primarily shown by road markings.
▷
▷
On routes without road signs.
In the case of railway crossings, lane mark-
ings and other situations which indicate
an overtaking restriction but which are not
signposted to this effect.
The system may also show speed limits that
apply to routes that are not marked if the navi-
gation system has current map data.
Depending on the equipment, an additional
icon with distance information may also be dis-
played to indicate the end of the no-overtaking
indicator.
In order for Speed Limit Info to function cor-
rectly, the current map data must be installed
for the country in which the vehicle is operated.
For information on the current map version
and map update, see Map update in the chap-
ter Navigation system.
Safety information
Speed limits for trailer operation are displayed
when the trailer socket is occupied or when the
trailer operation has been activated via iDrive.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Depending on the equipment, an approved
maximum speed can be set up for trailer oper-
ation, which will be taken into account for the
display of speed limits.
For further information:
▷
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, Communication, see page 6.
▷
Trailer operation, see page 344.
No-overtaking indicator
Sensors
The system is controlled by the camera behind
the windscreen.
Principle
Overtaking restriction signs and end of restric-
tion signs which have been detected by the
camera are indicated by corresponding icons
in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, the
Head-up display.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending
on the national-market version, Speed Limit
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument
cluster.
General
The system considers overtaking restrictions
and ends of restrictions that are indicated by
means of road signs.
It will not display anything in the following sit-
uations:
Displaying Speed Limit Info
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Warning when speeding"
No-overtaking indicator
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Speed limits"
Icon
Description
8. "Show current limit"
No overtaking.
Display
End of overtaking restriction.
General
Depending on the national-market version,
supplementary signs and no-overtaking indi-
cators are displayed together with Speed Limit
Info.
Supplementary signs
Icon
Description
Speed Limit Info
Speed limit with time limit.
Icon
Description
The speed limit only applies in
wet conditions.
Present speed limit.
The speed limit only applies in
snow.
No data available on the cur-
rent speed limit.
The speed limit only applies in
fog.
Speed Limit Info unavailable.
The speed limit applies for the
exit junction on the left.
The speed limit applies for the
exit junction on the right.
The display flashes if the detected speed limit
has been exceeded. Depending on the na-
tional-market version, an acoustic signal also
sounds.
The speed limit only applies
when towing a trailer.
Depending on the equipment:
speed limit with unrecognised
supplementary sign.
The warning if the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded can be activated or deacti-
vated via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
Speed Limit Display with Anticipatory
Indicator
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, an additional icon with dis-
tance information may indicate that a change
in speed limit is ahead. The Anticipatory Indi-
cator must be activated for Speed Limit Assist.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Temporary speed limits may also be dis-
played, for example at construction sites. Tem-
porary speed limits can only be displayed if
the following services are selected in the data
protection menu for the navigation system:
▷
▷
If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead.
When overtaking buses or trucks with road
sign stickers.
▷
▷
If there are electronic road signs.
▷
▷
"Learning map"
"Map update"
If road signs are detected that apply to a
parallel road.
For further information:
▷
If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
▷
▷
Cruise Control Systems
Settings
1.
Apps menu
Principle
The Cruise Control Systems provide support
when driving.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
General
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the equipment, the Cruise Con-
trol Systems include the following individual
systems.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
System limits
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
▷
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the individual systems are en-
hanced with additional functions.
Functional limitations
Functionality may be restricted or incorrect in-
formation may be displayed in some situations
such as:
Some functions can be operated via voice in-
put.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Road signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
For further information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see
Road signs do not correspond to the stand-
ard.
In areas that are not included in the map
data of the navigation system.
In the event of invalid, outdated or unavail-
able map data of the navigation system.
If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex-
ample due to changes in road layout.
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Button Function
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
Turning on/selecting Cruise Control
Systems
1.
Turn on: press the button.
2.
Select: when the system active,
press the button repeatedly until the de-
sired Cruise Control System is displayed in
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Individual functions may malfunction when
tow-starting or towing away with activa-
ted front-collision warning or Cruise Control
switched on. There is a risk of accident. Turn
off the front-collision warning and Cruise
Control before tow-starting or towing away.
Icon
Cruise Control System
Manual Speed Limiter.
Cruise Control.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Distance control.
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-
tant with tracking.
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus: system
for traffic queues.
To store the current speed.
The activated system is shown in green.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
The system is shown in white if the system can
be activated.
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
The system is greyed out if the system has
failed or if the functional requirements are not
met.
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed is increased
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
Interrupting Cruise Control Systems
automatically
Depending on the system, Cruise Control Sys-
tems are interrupted automatically, for exam-
ple, in the following situations:
Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the set speed changes
by 10 in the km/h display or 5 in the mph
display in the speedometer.
▷
When exiting selector lever position D to P,
N or R.
▷
When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
ing the driving stability.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Display in the speedometer
While Dynamic Traction Control is activa-
ted.
A mark is displayed on the
speedometer for the set speed.
▷
When braking manually.
▷
Green marker: system is ac-
tive.
Interrupting Cruise Control Systems
manually
▷
Grey mark: the system is in-
terrupted.
Press the key.
▷ No marker: system is switched off.
Notifications
Continuing Cruise Control Systems
In addition to the respective indicator lights,
notifications are displayed for some functions.
Press the key.
The scope of notifications can be set.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Turning off Cruise Control Systems
automatically
The Cruise Control Systems turn off automati-
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Notifications"
Switching off Cruise Control
Systems manually
7. Select the desired setting.
Press the key.
Manual Speed Limiter
The Cruise Control Systems are turned
off and the displays go out.
Principle
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set
a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding speed limits.
Adjusting speed values
Press the rocker switch on the steering
wheel up or down repeatedly until the
desired value is set.
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
When switching on at a standstill or driving
at low speed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the
speed limit.
General
The system allows speeds of 30 km/h/20 mph
and above to be set as a speed limit. Below
the set speed limit, the vehicle can be driven
without restriction.
The speedometer marker is set to the appro-
priate speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, the drive
mode may be changed or Dynamic Stability
Control activated.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turning the Cruise Control System
on/off
The Cruise Control System can be turned off or
cancelled automatically or manually.
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
For further information:
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
Changing the speed limit
To store the current speed.
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up
or down until the desired speed limit is
set.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded, for example when driving down-
hill, there is no active brake intervention.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
When Speed Limit Assist is not active, the cur-
rent speed can be stored by pressing a button:
Press the key.
Exceeding of speed limit
The system gives a warning if the current
speed exceeds the set speed limit.
Operation
Switching on the speed limiter
You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.
To intentionally exceed the set speed limit,
press the accelerator pedal all the way down.
1.
If necessary, press the button.
The limit automatically becomes active again
as soon as the current speed falls below the
set speed limit.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until the speed limiter is selected.
The current speed or a higher speed that has
already been stored is adopted as the speed
limit.
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Visual warning
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster flashes as long as the vehicle
is travelling above the set speed limit.
Cruise Control
Principle
Acoustic warning
Cruise Control allows a set speed to be speci-
fied using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The set speed is then maintained by the sys-
tem. It does this by automatically accelerating
and braking the vehicle as necessary.
▷
A warning sounds if you inadvertently ex-
ceed the set speed limit.
▷
If the speed limit is reduced to below the
current speed during the journey, the signal
sounds after a little time.
▷
No signal sounds if you intentionally exceed
the speed limit by fully pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
General
The system can be activated starting at
30 km/h/20 mph.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the char-
acteristics of Cruise Control may change in
certain areas; for example, acceleration may
change depending on the drive mode.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷
▷
▷
Green marker: system is ac-
tive.
Safety information
Grey mark: the system is in-
terrupted.
WARNING
No marker: system is
switched off.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Indicator light
Icon
Description
Indicator light illuminates: the system
is switched on.
Indicator light flashes: set speed limit
is exceeded.
Grey indicator light: the system is in-
terrupted.
WARNING
The risk of accident may increase if the sys-
tem is used in certain situations, such as:
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
On stretches of road with many corners
and bends.
Turning on the Cruise Control
In vehicles with distance control: change the
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control
without distance control.
▷
▷
In heavy traffic.
If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow,
in wet conditions or on a loose road sur-
face.
For further information:
There is a risk of accident or material dam-
age. Only use the system if it is possible to
drive at a constant speed.
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
WARNING
1.
If necessary, press the button.
The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-
take or called up accidentally. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.
Cruise Control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as the set speed.
The indicator lights are illuminated in the in-
strument cluster and the marker in the speed-
ometer is positioned at the current speed.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
When Cruise Control is switched on, the drive
mode may be changed or Dynamic Stability
Control activated.
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
Turning the Cruise Control System
on/off
The Cruise Control System can be turned off or
cancelled automatically or manually.
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
For further information:
To store the current speed.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
Setting the speed
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
To maintain/store the speed
While the system is interrupted, press
the rocker switch up or down once.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
When Speed Limit Assist is not active, the cur-
rent speed can also be stored by pressing a
button:
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
At the current speed
Press the key.
Press the button to continue Cruise
Control at the current speed.
Changing the speed
Speed Limit Assist: at the suggested
speed
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up
or down until the set speed is set.
If the system is active, the displayed
speed is stored and the vehicle adjusts to the
stored speed when the road is clear.
When a speed is suggested, press the
button to accept the Cruise Control at
the suggested speed.
The maximum speed which can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument cluster
When the rocker switch is pressed to the re-
sistance point and then held there: the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates without the need to
press the accelerator pedal.
Display in the speedometer
▷
Green marker: system is ac-
tive, the marker shows the
set speed.
When the rocker switch is released, the vehicle
maintains the final speed. Pressing beyond the
resistance point accelerates the vehicle more
rapidly.
▷
Grey marker: system is inter-
rupted; the marker shows the
stored speed.
▷
No marker: system is switched off.
Resuming Cruise Control
Indicator light
At the stored speed
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re-
sumed by calling up the stored speed.
Icon
Description
No indicator light: the system is
switched off.
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure
that the difference between the current speed
and the stored speed is not too great. Other-
wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration may occur.
Green indicator light: the system is
active.
With the system interrupted, press the
button.
Grey indicator light: the system is in-
terrupted.
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored val-
ues.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
In the following instances, the stored speed
value is deleted and therefore cannot be called
up again:
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
System limits
Safety information
The set speed is also maintained when driving
downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set
speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough
drive power.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Depending on the drive mode, it is possible
that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than
the set speed setting in some situations; for
example, on downhill or uphill gradients.
Distance control
Principle
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-
cle driving ahead can be set in addition to the
Cruise Control.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General
When the road ahead is clear, the system
maintains the set speed. The vehicle acceler-
ates or brakes automatically.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
If there is a vehicle driving in front, the sys-
tem adapts the speed of your vehicle in order
to maintain the set distance from the vehicle
ahead. The speed is adapted as far as the
given situation allows.
▷
▷
Apply the parking brake.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
on uphill or downhill gradient.
▷
Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
The distance can be set in several stages and
for safety reasons is dependent on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and
drives off again shortly afterwards, the system
is able to comprehend this as far as given con-
ditions allow.
WARNING
The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-
take or called up accidentally. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Otherwise, independent drive-off, for example,
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by
pressing the button for the speed setting on
the steering wheel.
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Sensors
WARNING
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
There is a risk of accident if the difference in
speed relative to other vehicles is too great.
This may occur, for example, in the following
situations:
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Front radar sensor.
For further information:
▷
▷
▷
When quickly approaching a slowly mov-
ing vehicle.
If another vehicle suddenly veers into the
vehicle's own driving lane.
Use
The system can be used to optimum effect on
well-constructed roads.
When quickly approaching stationary ve-
hicles.
The maximum speed which can be set is limi-
ted and depends on the vehicle and its equip-
ment, for example.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene
actively if the situation warrants it.
Depending on the equipment, higher set
speeds can also be selected after switching to
Cruise Control without Distance Control.
Overview
The system can also be activated when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turning on Cruise Control with
distance control
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
1.
If necessary, press the button.
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until distance control is selected.
To store the current speed.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
Cruise Control with distance control is active.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
the set speed.
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
The selected distance to a vehicle driving in
front is maintained.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
The indicator lights are illuminated in the in-
strument cluster and the marker in the speed-
ometer is positioned at the current speed.
When Distance Control is switched on, the
drive mode may be changed or Dynamic Sta-
bility Control activated.
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure
Setting the speed
The speed can be set with the buttons on the
steering wheel.
that the difference between the current speed
and the stored speed is not too great. Other-
wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration may occur.
For further information:
For further information:
Interrupting Cruise Control with
distance control automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
Distance
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
▷
When braking manually.
Selector lever position D is disengaged.
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility. System limits may mean
that deceleration is performed too late. There
is a risk of accident or material damage. Pay
close attention to the traffic situation at all
times. Adapt the distance to suit traffic and
weather conditions and comply with the pre-
scribed safe distance by braking if necessary.
While Dynamic Traction Control is activa-
ted.
▷
▷
▷
When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
ing the driving stability.
Driver's seat belt and driver's door are
opened.
The system has not detected any objects
for an extended period, for example, on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
Adjusting the distance
1.
Apps menu
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for example, by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
After an extended stationary period, if the
vehicle was decelerated to a standstill by
the system.
6. "Distance control"
7. "Distance"
Turning the Cruise Control System
on/off
8. Select the desired setting.
The Cruise Control System can be turned off or
cancelled automatically or manually.
Adapting the distance automatically
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be configured
so that the distance to the vehicle in front is
adapted automatically. The system takes into
For further information:
Resuming Cruise Control
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re-
sumed by calling up the stored speed.
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
account the traffic situation and ambient con-
ditions, e.g. poor visibility.
Display in the speedometer
▷
Green marker: system is ac-
tive, the marker shows the
set speed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷
Grey marker: system is inter-
rupted; the marker shows the
stored speed.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
▷
No marker: system is switched off.
6. "Distance control"
7. "Situational distance control"
Indicator lights and warning lights
Switching between Cruise Control
with/without distance control
Icon
Description
White indicator light:
No display of distance control be-
cause the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Safety information
WARNING
The indicator light is illuminated
green.
The system will not respond to traffic travel-
ling in front of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accident or
material damage. Adjust the set speed to the
traffic conditions and brake if necessary.
Vehicle ahead detected.
The vehicle symbol goes out if no ve-
hicle in front is detected.
The indicator light is illuminated
green:
Switching the Cruise Control mode
Turning Cruise Control without distance control
on or off:
Preceding vehicle has driven off.
The indicator light is illuminated grey:
The system is interrupted.
1.
Apps menu
The indicator light flashes grey:
2. "Vehicle apps"
The requirements for system opera-
tion are no longer being met.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
The system has been deactivated
but will continue to brake until you
actively take over by depressing the
brake or accelerator pedal.
6. "Distance control"
7. "Switch to cruise control"
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.
Warning light flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Displays in the instrument cluster
Brake and take avoidance manoeu-
vre if necessary.
General
Depending on the equipment, the displays in
the instrument cluster may vary.
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
At speeds below 80 km/h/50 mph, vehicles on
motorways are only overtaken with an adjus-
ted differential speed.
Assisted View
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
The driver can overtake or accelerate at any
time by pressing the accelerator pedal.
Switching the function on/off:
For further information:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Displays in the Head-up display
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
Set speed
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
6. "Distance control"
7. Depending on the national-market version:
▷
▷
"Avoid overtaking on the left"
"Avoid overtaking on the right"
Distance information
The icon is shown if your vehicle is too
close to the vehicle ahead.
System limits
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
▷
Cruise Control with distance control
switched off.
▷
▷
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.
Distance too close.
Detection range
▷
▷
Speed above approximately 70 km/h,
40 mph.
Preventing overtaking
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the function assists in avoiding
unintended overtaking on motorways.
The system can be set to avoid overtaking in
the slower lane.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The setting applies to speeds exceeding
80 km/h/50 mph.
The system's detection capability and auto-
matic braking capacity are limited.
When the set speed is significantly higher than
the speed in the adjacent lane, passing or
overtaking may still be possible even if the
function is switched on.
For example, two-wheel vehicles may not be
detected.
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
bends may not be anticipated in advance,
moderate your speed when cornering.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the
following situations:
The system has a restricted detection range.
Situations can arise on tight bends where a
vehicle driving in front will not be detected or
will be detected very late.
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow road
users.
▷
Depending on the equipment, at red traffic
lights.
▷
▷
For crossing traffic.
For oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles cutting in
When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the
curvature may cause the system to respond
temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If the
system responds by decelerating the vehicle,
you may compensate for this by accelerating
briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released
again, the system will resume control of the
vehicle's speed.
If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you,
the system might not be able to restore the se-
lected distance automatically. In some circum-
stances, it may also not be possible to restore
the selected distance if you are driving signifi-
cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example
when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle
is clearly detected in front of you, the system
prompts you to intervene by braking, and if
necessary by taking avoidance manoeuvre.
Driving off
The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in
some situations, for example:
▷
▷
▷
On steep upward gradients.
Before bumps or rises in the road.
When towing a heavy trailer.
In such cases, press the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
Weather
In adverse weather and lighting conditions,
system functionality may be limited as follows:
▷
▷
Impaired detection of vehicles.
Brief interruptions when vehicles have al-
ready been detected.
Pay attention when driving and respond to the
prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for example by braking, steering
or taking avoidance manoeuvre.
If the set speed is too high for cornering, it will
be reduced slightly in the bend. However, since
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The information on Cruise Control and Dis-
tance Control also applies.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained when driving
downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set
speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough
drive power.
For further information:
▷
▷
Depending on the drive mode, it is possible
that the vehicle will drive faster or slower than
the set speed setting in some situations; for
example, on downhill or uphill gradients.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Assisted Driving Mode
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance
Control with a Steering Assistant with tracking.
The system helps keep the vehicle in driving
lane. It does this by performing supporting
steering wheel movements, for example when
cornering.
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
To store the current speed.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
General
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
Depending on the speed, the system orien-
tates itself using the lane markings and vehi-
cles driving in front.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
Sensors
WARNING
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windscreen.
Front radar sensor.
Depending on the equipment:
Side radar sensors, front.
Depending on the equipment:
Side radar sensors, rear.
▷
▷
Sensors in the steering wheel.
For further information:
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The indicator light illuminates green.
The system is activated and assists in
keeping the vehicle in the driving lane.
Operating requirements
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below
210 km/h, approx. 130 mph or 180 km/h,
approx. 110 mph.
When the system is switched on, the front-col-
lision warning and, depending on the equip-
ment, the side collision warning are active.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The lane width is sufficiently wide.
Hands on the steering wheel rim.
Sufficiently wide curve radius.
Interrupting Assisted Driving Mode
automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
following situations:
Driving in the centre of the driving lane.
Turn indicators are switched off.
The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷
Depending on the equipment: at a speed
above 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph or
180 km/h, approx. 110 mph.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Distance control is active.
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
Front-collision warning is active.
Depending on the equipment:
Side collision warning is active.
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.
When the steering wheel is turned sharply.
When the vehicle leaves its own driving
lane.
▷
With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a
trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack
must be set on the control display in ac-
cordance with the use.
▷
▷
▷
When the turn indicator is activated.
When the driving lane is too narrow.
A lane boundary is not detected and there
is no vehicle driving in front.
Operation with a trailer or rear luggage
rack, see page 348.
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with distance control is
interrupted.
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode
The indicator light is illuminated grey.
1.
If necessary, press the button.
System is on standby and does not
make any steering wheel movement.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-
lected.
The system activates automatically when all
operating requirements are met.
The indicator light is illuminated grey.
System is on standby and does not
make any steering wheel movement.
The system activates automatically when all
operating requirements are met.
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
The indicator light is illuminated grey:
The system is ready.
For further information:
The indicator light is illuminated
green.
Displays on the steering wheel
The system is activated.
The system is helping the driver keep
the vehicle in driving lane.
The warning light flashes yellow and
the steering wheel vibrates:
A lane boundary has been crossed.
The warning light is illuminated yel-
low and a signal sounds:
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster.
A system interruption is imminent.
Warning light flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
The system is switching off or an in-
terruption of the system is imminent.
1.
Apps menu
The warning light is illuminated yel-
low:
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
Hands are not holding the steering
wheel. System remains active.
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Lighting elements"
7. Select the desired setting.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
The warning light is illuminated red, a
signal sounds:
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Hands are not holding the steering
wheel. System interruption is immi-
nent.
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
Adjusting the strength of the
steering wheel vibration
The system may possibly not per-
form any supporting steering wheel
movements.
1.
Apps menu
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
4. "Driver assistance"
Weather
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
In adverse weather and lighting conditions,
system functionality may be limited as follows:
▷
Impaired detection of vehicles and lane
markings.
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
Systems.
▷
Short-term interruptions in case of already
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.
Pay attention when driving and respond to the
prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for example by braking, steering
or taking avoidance manoeuvre.
System limits
General
The system cannot be activated or used use-
fully in certain situations.
Emergency Lane Assistant
Safety information
Principle
WARNING
The Emergency Lane Assistant can assist in
traffic queues on motorways or motorway-like
roads with the formation of an emergency
lane.
Due to system limitations, the system may
not respond at all, or may respond too late,
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Observe the in-
formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
General
As soon as the system detects a traffic queue,
a Check Control message is shown on the con-
trol display. Depending on the situation, the
vehicle will be steered to the right or left within
the current driving lane in order to form an
emergency lane.
The information on Cruise Control and Dis-
tance Control also applies.
For further information:
▷
▷
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
System limits of the sensors
Safety information
For further information:
▷
▷
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
Hands on the steering wheel
In the following situations, contact between the
driver's hands and the steering wheel is not
detected by the sensors:
▷
▷
Driving when wearing gloves.
Covers on the steering wheel.
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Lane Change Assistant
Principle
The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.
For further information:
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.
General
Operating requirements
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
▷
Assisted Driving Mode is activated.
Traffic queue is detected.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Safety information
Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
Lane boundary is detected.
WARNING
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Activating/deactivating the
Emergency Lane Assistant
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.
For further information:
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Emerg. Corridor Assistant"
Displays in the instrument cluster
Operating requirements
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode are met.
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers separating
oncoming vehicles, for example crash barri-
ers.
For further information:
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system
apply.
▷
▷
Since the start of the journey, a vehicle has
been detected at a sufficient distance be-
hind your own vehicle.
For further information:
Lane boundaries that can be driven over
are detected.
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Maximum speed 180 km/h, approx.
110 mph.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
The minimum speed is country-specific.
Steering wheel symbol and arrow
symbol for lane change green:
Turning on/turning off Lane Change
Assistant
The system carries out a lane
change.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Green steering wheel symbol and line
for lane boundary on the affected
side grey:
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
The system has detected the lane
change request. Lane change not
currently possible.
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Lane Change Assistant"
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Changing driving lane
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a
lane change.
2. Press the turn indicator lever in the desired
direction as far as the resistance point for
indicating briefly.
For further information:
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system
apply.
For further information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Supporting steering movements in the desired
direction can be felt a short time later.
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode Plus assists with vehi-
cle control in traffic queues on motorways.
After the lane change, the system helps the
driver keep the vehicle in lane.
The function makes it possible to temporarily
remove the hands from the steering wheel in
suitable driving situations.
Cancelling a lane change
The lane change can be cancelled by steering
movement into the opposite direction or by op-
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Sensors
Safety information
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
WARNING
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The camera behind the windscreen.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
The front radar sensor.
The radar sensors on the side, front.
The radar sensors on the side, rear.
The sensors in the steering wheel.
The Driver Attention Camera.
For further information:
Operating requirements
The Assisted Driving Mode notices also apply.
For further information:
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode are met.
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the
LED displays on the steering wheel are
switched on.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
Driving on motorways or similar roads with-
out pedestrians or cyclists and with physi-
cal barriers separating oncoming vehicles,
for example guard rails.
Switch last active Cruise Control
System on/off.
Select the desired Cruise Control
System.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The lane width is sufficiently wide.
Sufficiently wide curve radius.
Lane boundaries are detected.
A vehicle ahead is detected.
To store the current speed.
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
Speed below approx. 60 km/h, approx.
40 mph.
Continue Cruise Control Systems
with the saved setting.
▷
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is look-
ing at the traffic situation.
Interrupt Cruise Control Systems.
Rocker switch: to set the speed.
Switching Assisted Driving Mode
Plus on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.
Yellow: the system has been interrupted.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Red: the system is deactivated.
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
▷
Grab the steering wheel immediately with
your hands.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically
offered when Assisted Driving is active and
all functional requirements for Assisted Driving
Mode Plus are met.
For further information:
Two green LEDs are illuminated on the steer-
ing wheel.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system starts to help the driver to control
the vehicle.
System limits
The system limits of the following systems ap-
ply:
When the system is switched on, the following
functions are active:
▷
▷
Front-collision warning.
Side collision warning.
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode
Driver Attention Camera
Sensors in the vehicle
Displays in the instrument cluster
For further information:
Icon
Description
▷
▷
▷
Green indicator light: the system is
active.
White indicator light: the system can
be activated.
Speed Limit Assist
Principle
Displays on the steering wheel
Speed Limit Assist helps the driver to observe
speed limits. A suggested speed can be adop-
ted.
General
When the systems in the vehicle, for example
Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed
limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed
value for the following systems:
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.
Cruise Control.
Depending on the situation, the two LEDs
above the keypads light up.
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Distance control.
Overview
Assisted Driving Mode.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
Buttons on the steering wheel
The speed value is proposed as a new set
speed for adopting. The relevant system must
be activated for the speed value to be adopted.
Button Function
To accept the suggested speed
manually.
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-
tem and national-market version, the value
may be applied automatically.
Rocker switch: set the speed, see
Cruise Control.
Safety information
Switching Speed Limit Assist on/off
WARNING
1.
Apps menu
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Speed limits"
8. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on
the equipment, detected speed limits
are applied automatically.
WARNING
▷
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-
take or called up accidentally. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
"Show anticipation": current and up-
coming speed limits are displayed in
the instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
"Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assist will be turned off.
If necessary, other predictive comfort
functions will be turned off.
For further information:
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
General
Displays in the instrument cluster
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
to 60 km/h/40 mph can be set up.
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a Cruise Control Sys-
tem are activated.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 60 km/h/40 mph can be activated or
deactivated.
Icon
Function
Detected change in speed limit de-
tected with immediate effect.
Setting the speed adjustment
Remaining distance display shown
alongside the icon indicates there
might be a change in the speed limit
up ahead.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
Indicator light is illuminated green:
the detected speed limit can be
adopted with the SET button.
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting:
A green tick is displayed once it has
been adopted.
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance
for speed adjustments, which applies to
all speed limits.
Automatic adoption
"Adjust automatically": with the selected set-
ting, a detected speed limit is automatically
applied to Distance Control or the Manual
Speed Limiter adopted.
▷
▷
"2nd adjustm. up to": to activate or de-
activate additional speed adjustment.
"Adjust speed limits": with activated
additional speed adjustment, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
60 km/h/40 mph.
After an automatic adoption, the button
can be pressed to switch back to the
last set value of the set speed.
System limits
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually to the active Cruise Control System.
Take into account the Speed Limit Info system
limits.
When the SET icon is displayed, press
the button.
Depending on the national-market version, up-
coming speed limits may not be available for
application or they may only be available to
a certain extent, for instance information from
the map data of the navigation system.
Speed adjustment
Principle
Cruise Control without distance control: de-
pending on the system, it may not be possible
to adopt speed limits automatically.
It is possible to set whether the speed limit will
be adopted exactly, or with a tolerance.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to
the Cruise Control with distance control.
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
With a trailer tow hitch: speed values to be
adopted are limited to the value set on the
control display for trailer operation.
In addition, the notices for Cruise Control,
Distance Control, Assisted Driving Mode and
Speed Limit Assist apply.
For further information:
For further information:
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, see
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Operation with a trailer or rear luggage
rack, see page 348.
Operating requirements
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-
vated.
Adapting the speed to the
route
▷
▷
Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
With navigation system: route guidance is
activated.
Principle
The system can be configured so that with
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the
speed automatically to the route.
The use of navigation software via Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-
tional limitations, for example deviations
from instructions given by the navigation
system.
For example, the speed is reduced in the
following situations if necessary:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Before turning off.
Before a roundabout.
Before a bend.
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a
trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack
must be set on the control display in ac-
cordance with the use.
In front of an exit junction on motorways or
motorway-like roads.
Operation with a trailer or rear luggage
rack, see page 348.
Safety information
WARNING
Adapt speed automatically to route
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Adjusting the cornering speed
Depending on the national-market version, the
cornering speed can be set.
Lane change with active
route guidance
1.
Apps menu
Principle
2. "Vehicle apps"
Lane change with active route guidance as-
sists the driver when a lane change is needed
in order to reach a destination. A warning is
displayed in the instrument cluster. In addition,
a slight jerk can be felt on the steering wheel.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Cornering speed"
8. Select the desired setting.
General
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Safety information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted View is displayed in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
For further information:
System limits
Depending on the national-market version or
country in which the vehicle is currently being
driven, the function may not be available.
The system does not respond at all or re-
sponds only to a limited extent on the route
ahead in the following situations for example:
The Cruise Control, Distance Control and As-
sisted Driving Mode notices also apply.
▷
If the position of the vehicle cannot be
clearly determined by the navigation sys-
tem.
For further information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
In wintry road conditions.
Additionally, the limits of the Cruise Control,
distance control, Assisted Driving Mode and
Speed Limit Assist systems apply.
Operating requirements
For further information:
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-
tivated.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
A situation-dependent minimum speed has
been reached.
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap
in traffic in the adjacent lane.
Changing driving lane
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-
igation destination, a corresponding message
is displayed in the instrument cluster. In addi-
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering
wheel.
A lane boundary that can be driven over
is detected on the side of the desired lane
change.
▷
Route guidance is active in the navigation
system.
To change lanes, follow the instructions in the
instrument cluster.
The function is not available when using
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
1.
The system detects a suitable gap
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A
green check mark is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster on the lane change icon. The
system prepares for the lane change.
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
With a trailer tow hitch: operation with a
trailer or operation with a rear luggage rack
must be set on the control display in ac-
cordance with the use.
2. When a suitable gap has been found, the
speed is adapted so the vehicle stays level
with the gap.
Operation with a trailer or rear luggage
rack, see page 348.
3. A lane change suggestion is displayed with
a Check Control message.
Switching lane change on/off with
active route guidance
1.
4. If the traffic situation permits a lane change,
the driver can steer the vehicle into the ad-
jacent lane.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
If the vehicle is equipped with the Lane
Change Assistant: once the Check Control
message has been displayed, the Lane
Change Assistant can be started by operat-
ing the turn indicator.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Actively follow the route"
Display in the instrument cluster
Icon
Function
Switching the steering wheel jerk
on/off
The assistance provided by the jerk on the
steering wheel can be switched on/off.
Indicates a necessary lane change.
The icon varies depending on the
traffic situation.
A green check mark on the icon indi-
cates the active function.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
A red cross on the icon indicates
that the system cannot support lane
change.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the traffic situation is displayed
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Steering wheel impulse"
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
in the Assisted View in the central display area
of the instrument cluster.
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
For further information:
Overview
System limits
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-
trol and Assisted Driving Mode systems apply.
Button on the steering wheel
Button Function
For further information:
▷
▷
▷
Accept detected traffic lights man-
ually.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the camera behind
the windscreen.
Traffic light detection
Principle
Operating requirements
Traffic light detection assist when stopping at
red traffic lights and draws attention to when it
is possible to continue driving.
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-
vated.
▷
▷
Speed up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
General
The camera near the interior mirror is used to
detect red traffic lights.
Adjusting the traffic light detection
If necessary, the system also uses the Driver
Attention Camera and the information that has
been saved in the navigation system.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
Detected red traffic lights are displayed in the
instrument cluster and, depending on the set-
ting, can be taken into account either manually
or automatically during the journey.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Stop at traffic lights"
8. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
When traffic lights are hidden, for example,
by other vehicles.
Activating/deactivating drive off
reminder
With activated drive off reminder, there will be
visual and acoustic information as soon as
driving can continue at a green traffic light.
At a road junction with multiple lanes where
there are several sets of traffic lights.
For further information:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and junction assistant"
7. "Drive off reminder"
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Meaning
Red traffic light detected.
As soon as a green tick is displayed
after adoption, the vehicle brakes to a
standstill.
Green traffic light detected.
Grey traffic light: the system is inter-
rupted.
If the grey traffic light is displayed
with a red cross, it cannot be offered
for acceptance.
The detected traffic light can be ap-
plied with the SET button.
A green tick is displayed once it has
been adopted.
System limits
The traffic light detection system may have re-
stricted functionality in situations such as the
following:
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle equipment
Trailer Assistant, see page 350.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Safety information
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Park assistance systems
General
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
provide support with assistance functions, sen-
sors and different camera views when parking,
manoeuvring or driving in reverse.
For further information:
▷
▷
Overview
Semi-automatic camera perspective, see
Button in the vehicle
▷
Automatic camera perspective, see
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic activation of the panorama view,
Park Assist button
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Sensors
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Depending on the view, the vehicle surround-
ings or a partial area are displayed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
Front camera.
Depending on the national-market version, ei-
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-
era perspective is displayed.
Turning the display on/off
Exterior mirror cameras.
Reversing Assist Camera.
General
When driving forwards, the parking assistance
systems display turns off automatically when a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
For further information:
Operating concept
With the reverse gear
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the toolbars on the control display.
Choose a camera view by selecting the appro-
priate icon.
The display is automatically turned on if se-
lector lever position R is engaged while drive-
ready state is turned on.
Some parking assistance systems can be con-
figured individually in the Parking menu.
Via Parking Assistant button
Press the key.
Go to Park menu
1.
Apps menu
Via iDrive
2. "Vehicle apps"
1.
Apps menu
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Parking"
6. Select the desired settings.
Display in the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster shows displays of some
parking assistance systems, for example Park
Distance Control or Park Assist.
Display
Principle
The parking assistance systems support park-
ing and manoeuvring or reversing by display-
ing Park Distance Control and via various cam-
era views.
General
Depending on vehicle equipment, one or more
cameras record the area from different select-
able perspectives.
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking view
1
Status of parking assistance systems
Assisted View
2
3
1
Toolbar, left
Selection menu
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image
Selection window
Display on the control display
Automatic camera perspective
Semi-automatic camera perspective
Flank view
General
The display on the control display will vary de-
pending on the equipment and the activated
parking assistance system.
Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Assistance view
Depending on the equipment, different views
and settings can be selected via the left tool-
bar.
▷
"Parking view"
Depending on the equipment, camera im-
ages or the view of the Park Distance Con-
trol are displayed.
▷
"Assist view"
A stylised display of the vehicle top view is
displayed.
1
Toolbar, left
▷
▷
"Panorama view"
The display for crossing traffic is displayed.
"More"
2
3
4
Camera image
Selection window
Toolbar, right
▷
"3D view"
A three-dimensional view is shown.
"Trailer coupling view"
▷
The zoom for the trailer tow hitch can be
turned on.
▷
"Car wash view"
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The display of your own lane can be
turned on for easier driving into the car
wash.
Icon
Meaning
The icon indicates the following
meanings:
▷
"Settings"
No search for parking assistance
system services.
Settings can be entered in the Park
menu.
No other parking assistance sys-
tems available.
Toolbar, right
The parking assistance functions are displayed
in the right toolbar:
Parking assistance systems have
failed.
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.
Search for parking assistance sys-
tem services is active.
Available parking methods of the Park As-
sist.
White: an available manoeuvre is
selected but will not be performed.
Functional requirements have not
been met or the transfer of func-
tions has been completed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Reversing Assistant.
Functions of the Manoeuvre Assistant.
Trailer Assistant functions.
Additional information in case of malfunc-
tions.
Green: parking assistance system is
active. The functions are adopted
depending on the activated system.
Status of the parking assistance
systems
The status of the following parking assistance
systems is displayed:
Manoeuvre Assistant records the
manoeuvre to be stored.
Additional displays
▷
▷
▷
▷
Park Assist.
Manoeuvre Assistant.
Reversing Assistant.
Trailer Assistant.
General
Additional views, for example parking assis-
tance lines, can be shown on the camera im-
age on the parking assistance system display
to facilitate parking and manoeuvring.
The icons are shown on the control display in
the right toolbar and in the instrument cluster
in the status area. In addition to the icon, a
message is displayed on the control display.
A number of additional displays can be active
simultaneously.
Switching additional displays on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. Select the desired setting.
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Using parking assistance lines
Parking assistance lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line is within the boundaries of the
parking space.
Driving lane lines
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green
driving lane line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
The driving lane lines help in estimating the
space requirement when parking and manoeu-
vring on a level road surface.
Depending on the gear engaged, the driving
lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle.
The driving lane lines are continuously adap-
ted to the steering wheel movements depend-
ing on the steering wheel angle.
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
Obstacles detected by Park Distance Control
are marked on the camera image.
Coloured gradations of the obstacle markings
in green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Turning circle lines
Functional limitations
The system can only be used to a restricted
extent in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.
With open luggage compartment.
With the exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with grey hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown, for example an open door.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with lanes.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
Once the steering wheel has been turned be-
yond a certain angle, only one turning circle
line is displayed.
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
System limits
Reversing Assist Camera
Safety information
Principle
The Reversing Assist Camera assists in re-
verse parking and manoeuvring. It does this
by showing an image of the area behind the
vehicle on the control display.
WARNING
Due to system limitations, the system may
not respond at all, or may respond too late,
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Observe the in-
formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
Additional displays can be shown in the dis-
play, for example parking assistance lines and
obstacle marking.
General
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
System limits of the sensors
For further information:
Operating requirements
▷
The luggage compartment is fully closed.
Field of view
Due to the angle of view, the area under the
vehicle cannot be seen by the cameras.
▷
The camera area is clean and unobstruc-
ted.
Turning the Reversing Assist
Camera on/off
Detection of objects
The system cannot detect very low obstacles
and higher, protruding objects such as ledges.
Switching the camera view on
automatically
The Reversing Assist Camera is automatically
turned on if selector lever position R is en-
gaged while drive-ready state is turned on.
The objects shown in the control display may
be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance to the objects on the control dis-
play.
Projecting loads, rear luggage racks, or trailers
can restrict the detection range of the camera.
Switching the camera view off
automatically
When driving forwards, the Reversing Assist
Camera turns off automatically when a certain
distance or speed is exceeded, if necessary.
Malfunction
Failure of one camera is shown on the control
display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
displayed hatched on the control display.
Switching the camera view on/off
manually
1.
Press the button.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Depending on the equipment: the icon
in the selection window is automatically se-
lected.
Automatic camera
perspective
To exit the camera view of the Reversing
Assist Camera, select another camera view
in the selection window or press the button
again.
Principle
The automatic camera perspective displays
a steering angle-dependent view looking to-
wards the vehicle's direction of travel.
Deactivated Reversing Assist
Camera
This perspective adapts to the current driving
situation.
When the Reversing Assist Camera is deacti-
vated, for example when the luggage compart-
ment is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in grey.
General
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
switches to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to the
Lateral Parking Aid page.
Semi-automatic camera
perspective
When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-
matic camera perspective is, if necessary, exi-
ted and the system uses a semi-automatic
camera perspective to the rear. If required,
select the automatic camera perspective with
reverse gear engaged. The automatic camera
perspective is retained for the current parking
manoeuvre.
Principle
Depending on the parking direction and en-
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera
perspective is displayed with the areas in front
of or behind the vehicle.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
General
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Switching the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Switching semi-automatic camera
perspective on/off
Switching the camera view on/off
automatically
When the display of the parking assistance
systems is switched on, the automatic camera
perspective is automatically selected.
1.
Press the button.
icon in the selection window.
2. Select the
The icon in the selection window is auto-
matically selected.
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-
other camera view in the selection window.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select a different camera view in the selection
window.
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The system does not detect whether an ob-
stacle subsequently moves. Consequently, the
markings will no longer be shown on the dis-
play after the vehicle has been stationary for a
while. The area next to the vehicle needs to be
scanned again.
Switching the camera view on/off
manually
1.
Press the button.
2.
The icon in the selection window is auto-
matically selected.
To exit the steering-dependent camera
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window or press the button again.
Flank view
Principle
Lateral Parking Aid
The flank view displays the area at the side
of the vehicle to assist with positioning the ve-
hicle at the kerb or alongside any other obsta-
cles.
Principle
The Lateral Parking Aid is automatically dis-
played when the automatic camera perspec-
tive is switched on. This feature shows obsta-
cles located near the vehicle.
Flank view looks from the rear to the front. If
there is a hazard, it automatically focuses on
possible obstacles.
General
General
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Display
Switching the flank view on/off
Flank view can be selected for the right or left
side of vehicle in the selection window.
1.
2. Select the
side in the selection window.
Press the button.
icon for the desired vehicle
To exit the flank view, select another cam-
era view in the selection window.
Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides
of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
3D view
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.
Coloured markings: warning that obstacles
have been detected.
Principle
When the 3D view is selected, a circle is dis-
played on the control display.
System limits
The system only shows stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by the sensors
when driving past.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
General
Display
The current perspective is identified by a cam-
era icon.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Turning the 3D view on/off
1.
Press the button.
2. "More"
Two static circular segments help to estimate
the distance of the trailer to the trailer tow
hitch.
3. "3D view"
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
A docking line dependent on the steering
wheel angle assists with lining up the trailer
tow hitch with the trailer.
view in the left toolbar.
Trailer tow hitch view
Conveyor car wash view
Principle
To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is pos-
sible to zoom in on the area around the trailer
tow hitch.
Principle
The conveyor car wash view assists when en-
tering a car wash.
General
When zooming in, remember that the view
might no longer show certain obstacles.
General
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Switching the conveyor car wash
view on/off
Switching the trailer tow hitch view
on/off
1.
Press the button.
1.
Press the button.
2. "More"
2. "More"
3. "Car wash view"
3. "Trailer coupling view"
To exit the car wash view, select another
camera view in the left toolbar.
To exit the trailer tow hitch view, select an-
other camera view in the left toolbar.
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Display
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷
▷
Reversing Assist Camera.
Depending on the equipment: front camera.
Switching the panorama view on/off
1.
Press the button.
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
2. "Panorama view"
To exit the panorama view, select another
camera view in the left toolbar.
The display can be used to position the vehicle
correctly in the guide rails of the car wash.
Display
The vehicle must be able to roll freely while in
the car wash.
For further information:
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see
Panorama View
Principle
Yellow lines on the screen mask identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
road junctions.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
tion, the camera view of the Reversing Assist
Camera or front camera will be displayed.
General
Road users hidden by obstacles at the side
may not be seen from the driver's seat until
very late. The front camera and the Reversing
Assist Camera capture the area around the
side of the vehicle to improve the view.
Automatic activation of the
panorama view
The camera image is subject to varying levels
of distortion in some areas and is thus not suit-
able for estimating distances.
Principle
Positions at which the panoramic view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
Depending on the equipment, the function can
be used when driving forwards or reversing.
General
Up to ten activation points can be saved.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The activation points can be used when driving
forwards.
Editing activation points
Any or all of the activation points can be re-
named or deleted.
Follow the information in the Panorama view
chapter.
1.
Press the button.
Operating requirements
2. "Panorama view"
▷
A GPS signal must be received.
3. "Manage points"
▷
A BMW ID or a driver profile must be acti-
vated.
A list of all saved activation points is shown.
4. Select the desired setting.
▷
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
tion and vehicle angle must correspond to a
saved activation point.
Door opening angle
Saving activation points
1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the
system should switch on and stop.
Principle
Depending on the equipment, the door open-
ing angle indicator is displayed automatically
when stationary.
2.
Press the button.
The display helps to estimate how far the
doors can be opened in a parking situation.
3. "Panorama view"
4. "Activation point"
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
The current position is shown.
5. "Save activation point"
Activation points are saved with the following
information, for example:
General
▷
▷
▷
Location.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Location and street.
GPS coordinates.
Display
The automatically created location and street
information can be renamed.
Using activation points
Use of activation points can be switched on
and off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
The maximum door opening angles are dis-
played when the selector lever is in position P.
6. "GPS-based"
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
System limits
The system does not issue warnings about ap-
proaching road users.
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile device.
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated.
For technical reasons, the display of the vehi-
cle surroundings is distorted.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on
the control display does not superimpose any
other objects, it is necessary to park carefully
next to other objects.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
The function can be activated or deactivated
individually or together with other functions.
The perspective means that protruding objects
located higher up may be closer than they ap-
pear on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
Remote 3D View
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Principle
The My BMW App and the camera views in the
parking view, for example automatic camera
perspective, enable the display of the vehicle
surroundings on a mobile end device.
5. Select the desired setting.
After the activation, Remote 3D View can
be accessed in the My BMW App.
The function shows a view of the current situa-
tion.
Functional limitations
The system may have restricted functionality
or may not be available at all in situations such
as the following:
General
For reasons related to data protection, the
function can only be run three times in two
hours.
▷
With a door or the luggage compartment
open. Areas that the system is not able to
record are shown dark on the display.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually.
When other camera functions are being run
in the vehicle.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
The vehicle moves faster than at walking
speed.
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Reversing Assist Camera.
Operating requirements
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
age. Avoid approaching an object at speed.
Avoid driving off at speed while Park Dis-
tance Control is not yet activated.
Park Distance Control
Principle
Park Distance Control assists with parking. Ob-
stacles in front of or behind the vehicle are
signalled by acoustic and visual warnings.
Sensors
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
General
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
The range of the system is approximately 2 m,
6 ft, depending on the obstacle and environ-
mental factors.
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle
is approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object
and a collision is imminent.
Switching on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is given sooner, at a distance of ap-
prox. 1.50 m, 5 ft.
▷
With drive-ready state switched on, when
selector lever position R is engaged.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
▷
When approaching detected obstacles, if
the speed is less than approximately
4 km/h, approx. 2.5 mph The distance from
the obstacle at which the system activates
depends on the individual situation.
Safety information
The automatic activation in the event of detec-
ted obstacles can be activated or deactivated.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
Turning off the system automatically
When driving forwards, the system turns off
automatically when a certain distance or speed
is exceeded, if necessary.
WARNING
Approaching at high speed when Park Dis-
tance Control is activated may result in late
warnings due to the physical conditions.
There is a danger of injury or material dam-
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Switching the system on/off manually
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
Press the key.
▷
▷
On: the LED is illuminated.
Off: the LED is extinguished.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
If the system is manually switched on when
reverse gear is engaged, the image of the Re-
versing Assist Camera is displayed.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Acoustic warning
Switching off the acoustic warning
Depending on the national-market version, the
acoustic warning can be switched off after the
start of the parking manoeuvre.
General
An intermittent tone indicates that the vehicle
is approaching an object. For example, if an
object is detected to the rear left of the vehicle,
the sound is emitted from the rear left loud-
speaker.
Press the
icon in the status field at the top
of the control display.
No audible warning is emitted during active
parking.
The shorter the distance to an object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
When the Park Distance Control is switched
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically
switched on again.
A continuous tone sounds if the distance to
a detected object is less than approximately
20 cm, 8 in.
Visual warning
An alternating continuous tone sounds from
the front and rear loudspeakers if there are
objects in front and behind the vehicle at the
same time and at a distance of less than ap-
proximately 20 cm, 8 in.
General
When you are approaching an object, its prox-
imity is displayed on the control display and in
the instrument cluster as soon as the system is
activated.
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
Depending on the national-market version, the
interval tones are switched off after a short
time with the vehicle at a standstill.
Depending on the view, driving lane lines,
turning circle lines and obstacle markings are
shown for a better estimation of the space re-
quired.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Depending on the equipment, the detection
range of the sensors is represented by hatched
ring-shaped areas. Markings in green, yellow
and red indicate when obstacles are detected
in the detection range.
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
If equipped with the Crossing-traffic Warning:
depending on the equipment, the display also
warns of vehicles approaching from the sides
at the front and rear.
System limits
General
The function to protect the vehicle sides only
shows stationary obstacles that were previ-
ously detected by the sensors when driving
past.
Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides
of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
Display
The system does not detect whether an ob-
stacle subsequently moves. The grey hatched
areas on the sides are hidden after a certain
period of time when the vehicle is at a stand-
still. The area on the side of the vehicle must
be newly captured.
Depending on the equipment, warnings may
be displayed in front of, next to and behind the
vehicle.
Also observe the limits of the system in the
chapter “Parking assistance systems”.
Trailer operation
With a trailer or when the trailer socket is occu-
pied, the rear functions of Park Distance Con-
trol are switched off.
Display behind the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, the detection
range of the sensors is shown dark on the con-
trol display.
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the
rear functions of Park Distance Control remain
switched on when the trailer operation is acti-
vated.
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
Display next to the vehicle.
For further information:
▷
▷
▷
Hatched area: detection range of the sen-
sors.
Towing a trailer, see page 348.
Grey hatched area: no obstacles were de-
tected in the detection range.
False alarms
If the system is approaching its limits, false
alarms may occur.
Coloured markings in the hatched area:
obstacles were detected in the detection
range.
To reduce false alarms, for example in con-
veyor car washes, switch off automatic activa-
tion of Park Distance Control when obstacles
are detected if necessary.
▷
Hatched area interrupted: the area next to
the vehicle has not yet been recorded.
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Malfunction
Safety information
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
WARNING
Depending on the equipment, the de-
tection range of the sensors is not displayed
on the control display.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
A Check Control message is shown.
Park Distance Control failure. Have the system
checked by an authorised Service Partner or
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
Active Park Distance Control
WARNING
Principle
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
the assistance system in trailer operation or
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
with a bicycle carrier.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an immi-
nent risk of collision.
General
Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be
prevented under all circumstances.
The function is available at speeds below
walking speed when reversing or rolling back.
Sensors
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Pressing the accelerator pedal suppresses the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
Side ultrasonic sensors.
After emergency braking to a stop, it is possi-
ble to continue a slow approach to the obsta-
cle. To approach, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal and release it again.
Temporarily deactivating Active
Park Distance Control
If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer,
the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is pos-
sible at any time.
After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily deactivated on the control display.
1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
If the journey is continued in these environ-
mental conditions, no further emergency
braking is performed.
The function is automatically reactivated when
the Park Distance Control is switched on again.
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Settings
General
It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle
are protected by the system.
When obstacles are detected in close range in
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual
braking.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-
cle, the system will brake.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Display
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
As soon as the system intervenes, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
System limits
General
Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter
“Park assistance systems”.
Functional limitations
The system cannot be used in situations such
as the following:
WARNING
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
the assistance system in trailer operation or
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
with a bicycle carrier.
▷
The emergency braking function is deacti-
vated while Hill Descent Control is regulat-
ing the speed.
When driving with a trailer.
▷
If applicable, switch off the system temporarily,
if needed.
Sensors
The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Drive off monitoring
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Principle
If there is a collision risk, start-up monitoring
reduces the drive power when driving off.
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
Operating requirements
System limits
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged
when the vehicle is stationary.
General
Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter
“Park assistance systems”.
Obstacles at close range are detected in
front of or behind the vehicle.
The accelerator pedal is applied forcefully,
almost as far as it will go.
Trailer operation
The system is deactivated when the trailer
socket is occupied or when the trailer operation
is activated, for example when operating with
a trailer or bicycle carrier.
The accelerator pedal is applied as soon as
the selector lever position is engaged and
the obstacle is detected.
Turning start-up monitoring on/off
1.
Apps menu
Park Assist
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Principle
Park Assist provides support when parallel and
bay parking.
The system also makes it easier to leave par-
allel and bay parking spaces.
6. "Drive off monitoring"
7. "Drive off monitoring"
The ultrasonic sensors measure the surround-
ings on both sides of the vehicle when driv-
ing slowly straight forward. Suitable parking
spaces are calculated based on detected ob-
jects, for example, parked vehicles. The status
of the system is displayed.
A Check Control message is shown where ap-
plicable.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically turned on again at the
next drive.
The system calculates the optimum parking
line for driving in or out of parking spaces and
takes control of the vehicle during the parking
manoeuvre.
Cancelling reduced drive power
The reduction of the drive power is cancelled in
the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.
If the accelerator pedal is pressed twice.
A certain distance is travelled.
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.
Switch on.
If the reduction in drive power is cancelled by
covering a certain distance, the drive power is
released gradually.
Parking.
Leaving parking space.
The parking manoeuvre during parking is per-
formed automatically.
Display
As soon as the system intervenes, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
When leaving bay parking spaces, the vehicle
is manoeuvred completely out of the parking
space to enable continued driving in the de-
sired direction.
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The Park Assist Professional increases the
comfort and range of uses of the Park As-
sist. In addition to the parking methods of the
Park Assist, parking in parking spaces that are
marked with lines is possible.
the assistance system in trailer operation or
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
with a bicycle carrier.
With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-
noeuvre can be carried out with the Remote
Control Parking function from a smartphone.
WARNING
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-
tervene actively if the situation warrants it
Vehicle equipment
This system may not be available in the vehi-
cle in question, for example due to the selected
optional equipment, the national-market ver-
sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling
and software updates. This also applies to the
individual functions of the system.
Parking methods
Park Assist supports the following functions:
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
General
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the
road.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Bay parking: reverse or forward parking per-
pendicular to the road.
WARNING
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Exterior mirror camera.
Reversing Assist Camera.
Operating requirements
Measurement of parking spaces
▷
Driving forwards in a straight line up to a
maximum speed of approximately 35 km/h,
22 mph.
Leaving parallel parking spaces.
▷
Maximum distance from the row of parked
vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Suitable parking space
Parallel parking:
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, for
example, a parking vehicle: approx. 1 m, ap-
prox. 3 ft.
Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approxi-
mately 0.8 m, 2.6 ft.
Leaving bay parking spaces.
Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Bay parking:
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, for
example, a parking vehicle: approx. 1 m, ap-
prox. 3 ft.
▷
▷
Minimum width of gap: own vehicle width
plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft.
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
Park Assist Professional: parking in parking
spaces with parking lines.
The depth of bay parking spaces must be
estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limits, the system is only able to gauge the
depth of bay parking spaces approximately.
Sensors
The Park Assist is controlled by the following
sensors:
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:
The parking space must be clearly marked
with lines.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
Parking manoeuvre
The Park Assist Professional is additionally
controlled by the following cameras:
▷
Doors and luggage compartment are
closed.
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Leaving parking space
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Park As-
sist and an object is detected in the area
around the vehicle.
6. "Show assistance info"
▷
The vehicle was parked manually in reverse
and objects in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle are detected. The distance to a de-
tected kerb is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in.
Switching the acoustic signal on/off
The acoustic signal for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off.
1.
Apps menu
▷
The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft
longer than the vehicle.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Displays
General
6. "Sound when available"
The current status of the parking assistance
systems is shown in the right-hand toolbar, in
the instrument cluster and, depending on the
equipment, in the Head-up display.
Parking with Park Assist
1. For the parking space search, drive past
parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx.
35 km/h, approx. 22 mph and a maximum
distance of 1.5 m, approx. 5 ft.
Different icons are shown on the control dis-
play for selecting the parking method.
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-
sponds to the prioritised parking option.
Parking space search is activated.
The direction of the arrow changes in the park-
ing method icons when leaving parallel parking
spaces.
2. Press the
gear.
key or engage reverse
The display of the parking assistance sys-
tems is shown.
Icon
Meaning
Reverse parallel parking, right.
Reverse parallel parking, left.
Reverse bay parking.
Forward bay parking.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display and in the instrument
cluster.
3. On the control display: select an offered
parking method. If applicable, another park-
ing method can also be selected after-
wards.
Turning the parking manoeuvre
display on/off
When Park Assist is active, the parking ma-
noeuvre is displayed in the camera image on
the control display.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel.
Green: the system takes control of the
parking manoeuvre.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
3. "Driving settings"
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Cancelling Park Assist manually
Park Assist can be cancelled manually at any
time, for example:
Depending on the national-market version,
an intermittent tone or a continuous tone of
the Park Distance Control will sound.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
When parking manoeuvre is complete, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
The end of the parking manoeuvre is indi-
cated on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
▷
Step on the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec-
essary.
The Park Assist is cancelled without engaging
selector lever position P. Driving can continue
immediately.
Leaving parking space with Park
Assist
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Cancelling Park Assist automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
If the driver grips the steering wheel or
steers the vehicle.
2.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the button or engage reverse gear.
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
The display of the parking assistance sys-
tems is shown.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the parking brake is applied.
When the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
With open luggage compartment.
With open bonnet.
3. On the control display: select the desired
parking method.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel.
When the doors are open.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
Green: the system takes control of the
parking manoeuvre.
▷
▷
If you switch to other functions on the con-
trol display.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
When the display on the control display is
faded due to messages.
A message is displayed at the end of the
manoeuvre.
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.
On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
5. Make sure that it is safe to leave a parking
space with the given traffic situation, and
drive off as usual.
If it encounters objects that are difficult to
negotiate, for example kerbs.
▷
If objects appear suddenly.
The Park Assist is turned off automatically.
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by the Park Distance Control.
▷
On uneven road surfaces, for example
gravel roads.
When a maximum number of parking
moves or the parking time is exceeded.
▷
▷
▷
On slippery surfaces.
On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
When the system is stopped automatically, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
If leaves have collected or snow has drifted
or been piled up in the parking space.
A Check Control message is shown where ap-
plicable.
▷
▷
▷
If an already measured parking space
changes.
If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex-
ample at a quayside.
Continuing the parking manoeuvre
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
In some cases, parking spaces may be de-
tected that are not suitable or suitable park-
ing spaces may not be detected.
Switch the Park Assist on again and follow the
instructions on the control display or in the in-
strument cluster.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown.
Park Assist has failed. Have the system
checked by an authorised Service Partner or
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
System limits
General
Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter
“Park assistance systems”.
Manoeuvre Assistant
No parking assistance
Park Assist does not provide assistance in the
following situations:
Principle
The Manoeuvre Assistant provides support for
recurring parking and manoeuvring situations.
▷
▷
▷
▷
In tight bends.
In angled parking spaces.
In trailer operation.
Parking and manoeuvring operations can be
recorded and then carried out automatically by
the system.
Park Assist: for parking spaces that are
only marked with lines on the ground. The
system orients itself on objects.
Vehicle equipment
This system may not be available in the vehi-
cle in question, for example due to the selected
optional equipment, the national-market ver-
sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling
and software updates. This also applies to the
individual functions of the system.
▷
For special parking spaces, for example
paid parking spaces with automatic locking
mechanisms, coin parking, or mechanical
parking systems.
Functional limitations
For further information:
The system may have restricted functionality
in situations such as the following:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
General
WARNING
A recurring manoeuvre is driven manually and
thereby recorded.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-
tervene actively if the situation warrants it
When the vehicle reaches the activation range
on the distance covered by the stored ma-
noeuvre, the manoeuvre can be activated on
the control display or in the instrument cluster.
After the activation, the system takes control
of the vehicle and carries out the manoeuvre
automatically.
Detection range
The manoeuvre can be performed with the Re-
mote Control Parking function using a smart-
phone.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
Safety information
The detection range for a manoeuvre is divi-
ded into the following areas:
WARNING
▷
▷
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will
begin with the localisation in the back-
ground within a range of approx. 8 m/26 ft
around the path of a stored manoeuvre.
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of
approx. 2 m, approx. 6 ft around the path,
the stored manoeuvre will be displayed on
the control display.
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored
manoeuvre can be activated on the control
display within a range of approx. 1 m, ap-
prox. 3.5 ft. After the activation, the system
takes control of the vehicle and carries out
the manoeuvre automatically.
WARNING
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
the assistance system in trailer operation or
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
with a bicycle carrier.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors and cameras:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
▷
Side ultrasonic sensors.
Front camera.
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Exterior mirror cameras.
Reversing Assist Camera.
5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording"
6. "Name:"
If necessary, enter the desired name for the
recorded manoeuvre.
Recording manoeuvre
7. "Save recording"
General
Do not move the vehicle until the recording
has been stored.
Up to ten manoeuvres can be recorded at dif-
ferent locations.
Up to four overlapping manoeuvres can be re-
corded.
Performing stored manoeuvre
1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range
and stop. The control display and instru-
ment cluster indicate that a stored ma-
noeuvre can be activated.
Identical manoeuvres under different environ-
mental factors can be recorded, for example
light conditions.
For each manoeuvre, a maximum distance
covered of 200 m/656 ft is possible.
2.
: activate stored manoeuvre.
Green: after the activation, the system
takes control of the vehicle and carries out
the manoeuvre automatically. If applicable,
follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
In total, a distance covered of approx.
600 m/approx. 1969 ft distributed to the ten
possible manoeuvres can be recorded.
Manoeuvres with a distance covered of less
than 6 m/20 ft cannot be recorded.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Recording manoeuvre
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from
which a manoeuvre must be recorded and
stop.
When parking manoeuvre is complete, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
Cancelling the Manoeuvre Assistant
manually
The vehicle can be controlled manually during
an active manoeuvre by taking the following
actions:
2.
Press the button.
The display of the parking assistance sys-
tems is shown.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
3.
"Record new path"
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-
tion.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
The manoeuvre is recorded.
When recording the distance covered, do
not drive faster than approx. 15 km/h, ap-
prox. 9 mph.
▷
Step on the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
The Manoeuvre Assistant is cancelled without
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can
continue immediately.
While recording, the distance covered will
be displayed.
When the maximum distance covered or
the speed is reached, a message will be
displayed and an acoustic signal will sound.
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver assistance"
5. "Parking"
Cancelling the Manoeuvre Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
6. "Recorded paths"
7. Select the desired setting.
▷
If the driver grips the steering wheel or
steers the vehicle.
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
System limits
General
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
With open luggage compartment.
With open bonnet.
Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter
“Park assistance systems”.
When the doors are open.
Functional limitations
The system does not provide support in trailer
operation.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic
sensors and cameras are reached.
System limits can cause functional limitations,
for example, in the following situations:
If you switch to other functions on the con-
trol display.
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.
On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
When the display on the control display is
faded due to messages.
In case of recorded manoeuvres where the
system minimum distance to objects can-
not be maintained.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
In case of obstacles.
On snow-covered or slippery road.
When the lane is too narrow.
On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
In trailer operation.
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the distance covered, for exam-
ple other tyres or changed environmental
factors like light conditions or weather.
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-
noeuvres when driving into the activation
range.
In the event of an automatic cancellation of
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a
complete stop and selector lever position P is
engaged.
In multi-storey car parks, for recordings on
different parking levels or for recordings
that run over several parking levels.
An interrupted manoeuvre can be continued,
if needed. Turn the Manoeuvre Assistant on
again and follow the instructions on the control
display or in the instrument cluster.
Remote Control Parking
Editing stored manoeuvres
Individual or all manoeuvres can be deleted or
renamed.
Principle
With the Remote Control Parking function, the
vehicle can be driven by remote control in
parking and manoeuvring situations of the Ma-
noeuvre Assistant and Park Assist Professio-
nal.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The manoeuvre is performed independently
outside the vehicle using a smartphone. This
makes it easy to get in and out.
▷
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be connected to a
ConnectedDrive account.
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone.
In suitable parking spaces, for example, a ga-
rage, the parking position can be corrected
with Remote Control Parking through slight
manoeuvring.
The distance between the vehicle and
smartphone is no greater than approx. 6 m,
approx. 19 ft.
A manoeuvre that has already begun can be
continued at any time with Remote Control
Parking.
▷
A valid digital key must be set up in the
vehicle.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment
This system may not be available in the vehi-
cle in question, for example due to the selected
optional equipment, the national-market ver-
sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling
and software updates. This also applies to the
individual functions of the system.
Performing a parking manoeuvre
with Remote Control Parking
1. Engage selector lever in position P.
2. Exit the vehicle and close the doors and
luggage compartment.
For further information:
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the
My BMW App and manoeuvre forwards or
backwards or select the desired parking
method.
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
General
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.
Observe the contents in the chapter Park As-
sist and Manoeuvre Assistant.
In the event of obstacles, stop the vehicle
manually.
Protect the smartphone against unauthorised
use.
Depending on the selection in the
My BMW App, the vehicle is parked at the
end of the parking procedure or control of
the vehicle can be assumed again.
The low-beam headlights are switched on for
the duration of the manoeuvre.
A parking procedure offered by Park Assist
Professional is only available for Remote Con-
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the
vehicle.
System limits
Environmental factors, for example, an im-
paired Bluetooth connection due to external in-
terference, can cause interruptions in the exe-
cution of the Remote Control Parking function.
Operating requirements
▷
All occupants have exited the vehicle.
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is not
sufficiently ensured, for example due to exces-
sive discharge, remote controlled parking may
not be available. Follow the instructions in the
My BMW app.
▷
Doors and luggage compartment are
closed.
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with Re-
mote Control Parking.
The My BMW App must be installed on a
compatible smartphone.
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Reversing Assistant
Principle
The Reversing Assistant assists when driving
in reverse, for example when driving out of
tight or confusing parking or street situations.
WARNING
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
the assistance system in trailer operation or
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
with a bicycle carrier.
Vehicle equipment
This system may not be available in the vehi-
cle in question, for example due to the selected
optional equipment, the national-market ver-
sion or the possibility of subsequent enabling
and software updates. This also applies to the
individual functions of the system.
WARNING
For further information:
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
kerbs. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Observe the traffic situation and in-
tervene actively if the situation warrants it
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
General
The vehicle saves the driving movements for
the last distance covered. This stored distance
can be driven back with automated steering.
Operating requirements
▷
To save the distance covered, drive for-
wards without interruption.
The system takes control of the steering. The
speed must be controlled by the driver using
the accelerator pedal and the brake.
▷
To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 35 km/h/22 mph.
Reversing Assistant: a maximum of 50 m, ap-
prox. 164 ft is stored.
▷
▷
No trailer operation.
Reversing Assistant Professional: a maximum
of 200 m, approx. 656 ft is stored.
Reversing Assistant Professional: suffi-
ciently bright light conditions on the stored
distance covered.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
assistance systems”.
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: the cam-
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.
Safety information
Reversing with automated steering
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ready to take over steering and braking at
2.
3.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the button or engage reverse gear.
The display of the parking assistance sys-
tems is shown.
"Start Reversing Assistant"
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Parking
CONTROLS
The length of the distance covered is dis-
played on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
After an extended period of time when the
vehicle is stationary.
If applicable, follow the instructions on the
control display or in the instrument cluster.
When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for example with a maximum steering
wheel angle.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
▷
When the display on the control display is
faded due to messages.
Green: the system takes control of the
steering.
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle
surroundings.
When the vehicle is rolling, for example on a
slope.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Pay atten-
tion to the information on Park Distance
Control.
▷
▷
In case of changed environmental factors.
When the trailer socket is occupied or trailer
operation is activated.
▷
▷
At speeds over approximately 10 km/h,
6 mph.
5. Shortly before the end of the stored dis-
tance covered, an acoustic signal will sound
and a message is displayed.
Reversing Assistant Professional: in the
event of functional limitations of the sen-
sors from approx. 50 m, approx. 164 ft.
Stop when you reach normal road traffic
at the latest and take over control of the
vehicle, for example by engaging a forward
gear.
System limits
▷
The maximum speed when driving in re-
verse is limited to approx. 10 km/h, approx.
6 mph.
Cancelling the Reversing Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Reversing Assis-
tant can be cancelled manually:
A warning occurs at a speed of approx.
7 km/h, approx. 4 mph.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
▷
▷
"Cancel"
Press the key.
Various factors can cause the vehicle to devi-
ate sideways when reversing along the saved
distance covered. These factors include, for
example:
Cancelling the Reversing Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
If the steering wheel is moved with the ve-
hicle stationary while the distance covered
is being saved.
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered in question.
▷
If the driver grips the steering wheel or
steers the vehicle.
Certain road characteristics, for example
gradients, inclines or slippery road surface.
▷
When shifting from reverse gear to another
selector lever position.
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the distance covered, for exam-
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
Adaptive M suspension
Professional
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
The Adaptive M suspension Professional is an
actively controlled suspension and includes the
following systems:
▷
▷
▷
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Adaptive M suspension
Active Roll Stabilisation
Principle
The adaptive M suspension is an intelligent,
controllable sport suspension.
Principle
Active roll stabilisation reduces body lean that
occurs when cornering at high speed or taking
sudden avoidance manoeuvres.
The suspension reduces body movements
with a sporty driving style or on an uneven
road.
General
The side incline of the vehicle is compensated
by continual adjustments on the front and rear
axle. Thus, the vehicle is constantly stabilised.
General
The intelligent control of the suspension in-
creases the driving dynamics and driving com-
fort depending on the road condition and driv-
ing style.
Agility and driving comfort are increased in all
driving conditions.
Depending on the equipment, the rear-axle
locking differential can be adapted to the re-
spective traction conditions as necessary.
Setting
The system offers various settings, from com-
fortable travel to sporty driving.
Setting
The settings are assigned to the different drive
modes of Driving Experience Control.
The system offers various shock absorber set-
tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
For further information:
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the selected drive mode as well as the road
condition and driving style.
For further information:
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Lowest vehicle level, for driving at higher
speeds.
Adaptive suspension
▷
▷
Normal level:
Principle
Standard level, for normal roads and nor-
mal speeds.
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent con-
trollable suspension.
High level 1:
The suspension reduces body movements
with a sporty driving style or on an uneven
road.
Raised vehicle level, for easy terrain at a
reduced speed.
At higher speeds, the vehicle is lowered if
necessary.
General
▷
High level 2:
The intelligent control of the suspension in-
creases the driving dynamics and driving com-
fort depending on the road condition and driv-
ing style.
Highest vehicle level, for very bumpy terrain
in the lowest speed range.
At higher speeds, the vehicle is lowered if
necessary.
For further information:
Two-axle ride level control
Principle
Safety information
The two-axle ride level control uses air springs
to ensure the best possible driving comfort.
The vehicle is maintained at the set vehicle
level regardless of the load.
WARNING
Parts of the body may become trapped or
vehicle components damaged when adjust-
ing the vehicle level. There is a danger of in-
jury or material damage. When adjusting the
vehicle level, make sure that the movement
ranges around the vehicle and the wheel
arches are kept clear.
General
The drive modes of the Driving Experience
Control can be used to adjust the shock ab-
sorber settings from comfortable to sporty.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle
level can be set to different levels:
▷
Entry level:
Overview
Lowest vehicle level that can be set.
Rocker switch in the vehicle
It is possible to set the entry level at a
standstill with the following options:
▷
With the rocker switch in the centre con-
sole.
▷
▷
With the button in the lower tailgate.
With the My BMW app.
When you drive off, the vehicle is raised ac-
cording to the selected drive mode.
▷
Sport level:
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Rocker switch for self-levelling
suspension.
Setting the vehicle level manually
Button on the lower tailgate
Press the rocker switch forwards:
The vehicle is raised to the next-higher vehicle
level.
Pull the rocker switch backwards:
The vehicle is lowered by one level.
Button for self-levelling suspension.
LED display on the rocker switch
▷
▷
▷
LED illuminated: display of the current vehi-
cle level.
Operating requirements
All doors are closed.
LED flashes: adjustment procedure active.
The vehicle is raised or lowered.
Opening a door while raising or lowering the
vehicle interrupts the process. Once the door
has been closed, the process continues.
LED flashes rapidly: the selected vehicle
level is not currently possible.
▷
▷
LED off: the system is deactivated.
Activating/deactivating self-levelling
suspension
The system can be deactivated, e.g. for a
wheel change or for towing.
All LEDs on the rocker switch flash: the sys-
tem is initialising. The selected vehicle level
is shown after initialisation, if applicable.
Setting the vehicle level
automatically
Push the rocker switch forwards or pull it back-
wards and hold for approx. 7 seconds.
When the rocker switch is released, the LED
indicates the system status.
While driving
The vehicle will lower automatically in the
following situations:
▷
LED lights up: self-levelling suspension is
activated.
▷
▷
When switching to SPORT driving mode.
At higher speeds.
▷
LED goes out: self-levelling suspension is
deactivated.
If the vehicle leaves the set vehicle level due to
the speed, the vehicle level is set according to
the selected drive mode.
After moving off at speeds above approx.
10 km/h, approx. 6 mph, self-levelling suspen-
sion is automatically activated.
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
In the event of a flat tyre
Setting the vehicle level
If a loss of tyre inflation pressure is detected
on one wheel, the wheel load is automatically
reduced to increase the possible distance trav-
elled. In this situation, only the normal level is
available.
For safety reasons, lowering is only possible
from the normal level or the sport level.
1. Apply the parking brake and switch off
drive-ready state with the Start/Stop but-
ton.
2. Close the doors.
Adjusting the vehicle level with the
button in the lower tailgate
3. In the My BMW app, switch to the menu for
the entry level and follow the instructions in
the app.
Principle
For further information:
When the tailgate is open, the button on the
tailgate can be used to lower the vehicle to the
entry level and raise it again for easier loading
and unloading.
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication, see page 6.
Cancelling the adjustment procedure
An adjustment process that was started in the
My BMW app can be cancelled with the app.
Setting the vehicle level
Press the button on the lower tailgate.
The vehicle is lowered to the entry
level. Press the button again to raise.
Extended stationary periods
The vehicle may lower itself during extended
stationary periods. This is not a malfunction.
The change of level is indicated by the flashing
of the LED in the button.
If drive-ready state is switched on with the
doors closed, the vehicle is automatically
raised to the normal level.
During the raising process, the vehicle is raised
from the entry level to the last level selected or
to the normal level.
It may take several minutes to raise to normal
level, depending on the vehicle condition.
Cancelling the adjustment procedure
Press the button again. The vehicle is raised or
lowered back to the desired level.
System limits
▷
▷
▷
▷
A change of vehicle level may not be possi-
ble during sporty driving.
Lowering the vehicle level with the
My BMW App
It may not be possible to change the vehicle
level when the axles are articulated.
It may only be possible to raise the vehicle
level in the drive-ready state.
Principle
With the My BMW App and a compatible Apple
iPhone, the vehicle level can be set when sta-
tionary, for example, for easier loading or more
convenient entry.
If the vehicle battery charge level is too low,
it may not be possible to change to another
vehicle level.
▷
If the vehicle level is changed several times
in quick succession, the system switches
itself off in order to protect against over-
heating, and the system is either tempo-
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
rarily unavailable, or system operation is
delayed. Allow the system to cool down if
necessary.
Overview
▷
▷
If the payload is increased, the highest driv-
ing level may be disabled or automatically
exited to protect the system.
If the trailer socket is occupied, only the
normal level is available.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown.
1
xOffroad: button
xOffroad: rocker switch
In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have
changed handling characteristics or a noticea-
bly restricted driving comfort.
2
Activating xOFFROAD driving mode
Have the system checked by an authorised
Service Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
Press the key.
or
xOffroad package
Push the rocker switch forwards or pull it back.
The following functions are carried out:
Principle
The xOffroad package supports the driver
when driving in off-road conditions or in the
event of reduced traction.
▷
▷
The LED in the button illuminates.
The following xOFFROAD driving mode is
set: "xGRAVEL".
For further information:
xOFFROAD driving modes in detail, see
General
The system offers a choice of four different
xOFFROAD driving modes. When an xOFF-
ROAD driving mode is switched on, individual
systems in the vehicle are adjusted for the best
possible traction and driving stability.
Setting the xOFFROAD driving
mode
xOFFROAD driving modes can be selected ac-
cording to the ground conditions.
The vehicle level is adjusted for the respective
xOFFROAD driving mode with two-axle ride
level control.
Observe the information in the driving hints
chapter on driving on poor road surfaces.
For further information:
Press the rocker switch forwards or pull it
backwards until the desired xOFFROAD driv-
ing mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Driving on poor road surfaces, see page 338.
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Deactivating xOFFROAD driving
mode
xOFFROAD
driving mode
Settings
Press the key.
"xGRAVEL"
Setting for easy terrain.
The LED in the button is no longer illu-
minated.
The high level 1 of the two-
axle ride level control is set.
The last drive mode set via Driving Experience
Control is activated.
"xSAND"
Setting for difficult terrain
with loose ground.
The high level 1 of the two-
axle ride level control is set.
If a drive mode is selected via Driving Dynam-
ics Control, the xOffroad driving mode is auto-
matically deactivated.
For maximum traction, deac-
tivate Dynamic Stability Con-
trol.
xOFFROAD driving modes in detail
In order to avoid automatic
activation of Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control by the front-colli-
sion warning, deactivate the
front-collision warning if nec-
essary.
When xOFFROAD driving modes are switched
on, the following vehicle settings are made:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The Automatic Start/Stop function is
switched off.
The shift characteristics and the response
to the accelerator pedal are adapted.
"xROCKS"
Setting for difficult terrain
with severe unevenness on
the ground.
The all-wheel drive system is set for opti-
mum traction.
The response characteristics of the Anti-
lock Braking System are adapted.
The high level 2 of the two-
axle ride level control is set.
The response characteristics of the Dy-
namic Stability Control are adapted.
For maximum traction, deac-
tivate Dynamic Stability Con-
trol.
Depending on the selected xOFFROAD driving
mode, additional vehicle settings are made.
In order to avoid automatic
activation of Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control by the front-colli-
sion warning, deactivate the
front-collision warning if nec-
essary.
"xSNOW"
Setting for slippery roads.
The shift characteristics of
the transmissions are set to
smooth gear changes. The
vehicle may move off in sec-
ond gear.
The characteristics of the
accelerator pedal are opti-
mised for smooth drivability.
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
For further information:
▷
▷
xOFFROAD display
Activating an xOFFROAD driving mode auto-
matically opens the xOFFROAD display in Live
Vehicle menu.
The following information is displayed:
▷
▷
Distribution of drive torques to wheels.
Longitudinal inclination: specified in per-
cent.
▷
▷
▷
Transverse inclination: specified in degrees.
Graphic of the wheel angle.
With navigation system: elevation at current
position.
▷
Self-levelling suspension of the two-axle
ride level control.
For further information:
System limits
At higher speeds, the properties of the selec-
ted xOFFROAD driving mode may be reduced.
BMW IconicSounds
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the drive sound of the vehicle
can be adjusted with BMW IconicSounds.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
6. Select the desired setting.
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Air conditioning
Icon
Function
Vehicle equipment
Amount of air.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Air distribution.
For further information:
SYNC programme.
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Seat and armrest heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
Air conditioning control
Overview
Functions in the air conditioning menu
Icon
Function
Automatic programme.
Buttons, integrated automatic
heating/air conditioning system
Temperature.
Air conditioning function.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation function.
Icon
Function
Defrost function.
Automatic air recirculation con-
trol.
Rear window heating.
Fresh air.
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Buttons, automatic rear air-
conditioning system
Display in the control display
1
Toolbar
Icon
Function
2
3
4
Air conditioning functions, driver's side
Air conditioning functions, passenger's side
Air conditioning bar
Automatic programme.
Temperature.
Go to air conditioning functions
Via air conditioning bar:
Air conditioning function.
Maximum cooling.
Amount of air.
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air
conditioning bar.
Or:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Climate control"
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
Air distribution.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "All climate functions"
Seat and armrest heating.
The complete air conditioning system is
switched on/off with the last settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual air conditioning functions can be
turned off.
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Turning automatic rear air-
conditioning system on/off
Automatic programme
Principle
Operating requirements
The automatic programme ensures a comfort-
able climate, which can be modified with the
set temperature and individual settings.
▷
Automatic air conditioning is turned on.
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.
The automatic programme cools, ventilates, or
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
General
2. "Settings"
Depending on vehicle equipment, the auto-
matic programme provides the best possible
settings for air conditioning functions depend-
ing on the outside temperature, interior tem-
perature, sunlight, seat occupancy, and the de-
sired temperature setting:
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Rear climate control"
5. Select the desired setting.
The automatic rear air-conditioning system
can be activated with the default setting for
temperature and AUTO programme:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Amount of air.
"Activate with default settings"
Air distribution.
Temperature.
Switching on using the button
Press one of the following buttons:
Seat and armrest heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
Automatic programme.
The automatic programme takes the seat oc-
cupancy into account to ensure energy-effi-
cient control adapting to the vehicle passen-
gers.
Upper side of the button for amount of air,
manual.
▷
Air distribution, manual.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic programme in such a way
that condensation is avoided as far as possi-
ble.
Switching off using the button
Press and hold the lower side of the
button.
Switching the automatic
programme on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Locking the automatic rear air-
conditioning system
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Automatic programme"
3. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Functional example
When the automatic programme is turned on,
the intensity of seat heating can be adjusted:
Switching the automatic rear air-
conditioning system programme
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the
air conditioning bar.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2.
Seat heating.
2. "Settings"
3. Select the desired settings, for example,
"HIGH".
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Automatic programme"
5. Select the desired setting.
The individually selected settings of the air
conditioning functions are stored and automat-
ically set up again, for example, after the vehi-
cle is started again.
Using the button
Press the key.
Display
The button LED lights up when the au-
tomatic programme is switched on.
The indicator in the climate control bar informs
of the temperature differential between config-
ured desired temperature and current interior
temperature:
Setting the intensity
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating up
or cooling.
General
When the automatic programme is enabled,
the intensity of individual air conditioning func-
tions can be individually adjusted, for example:
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
Active air conditioning functions, for example,
seat heating are displayed as icons in the cli-
mate control bar.
▷
▷
▷
"LOW"
"MEDIUM"
"HIGH"
Active air conditioning functions are highligh-
ted in colour in the climate control menu.
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted during the jour-
ney. It is not necessary to manually change the
desired intensity to lower or higher levels while
driving.
Temperature
Principle
The automatic air conditioning cools or heats
to the set temperature and then keeps the
temperature constant.
General
Avoid switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
conditioning may not have sufficient time to
adjust to the set temperature.
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Adjusting the temperature
Upper body temperature
General
The air temperature in the upper body area
can be adjusted.
The set interior temperature for driver and
front passenger is not changed by this.
Adjusting the upper body temperature
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The desired temperature can be set individu-
ally in the menu bar for the driver and front
passenger.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
4. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
5. Increase or decrease the temperature.
▷
▷
Increase the temperature.
Reduce the temperature.
Air conditioning function
Setting the temperature adjustment
When the automatic programme is switched
on, the speed of the heating and cooling proc-
ess can be adjusted as follows:
Principle
The air in the interior is cooled and dried and
then heated again depending on the tempera-
ture setting.
▷
"BALANCED".
The setting enables a smooth, low-noise
adjustment of the interior temperature.
Operating requirements
▷
"DYNAMIC".
Standby state or drive-ready state is switched
on.
The setting enables a quick adjustment of
the interior temperature with a high amount
of air.
Switching the cooling function on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Setting the automatic rear air-
conditioning system temperature
2. "A/C"
Depending on the weather conditions, the
windscreen and the side windows may mist
over for a short time after switching on drive-
ready state.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
Cooling produces condensation, which then
exits underneath the vehicle.
3. "Second row of seats"
4. Set the desired temperature.
Using the button
Press the upper or lower side of the
button to set the desired temperature.
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
When the air recirculation function is turned off,
outside air is directed into the interior.
Maximum cooling
In the automatic recirculated-air control, out-
side air is drawn in or the interior air is circula-
ted, depending on the outside air quality.
Principle
The function enables quick and intense cooling
of the interior.
The interior filter cleans the incoming outside
air or the circulated inside air in air recirculation
mode.
General
The system is set to the lowest temperature
and maximum amount of air.
Turning the air recirculation function
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The function is automatically activated in the
rear when the SYNC programme is turned on.
2. The current operating mode is displayed in
the toolbar. Select the desired setting in the
toolbar:
Operating requirements
The function is available at an outside temper-
ature above approximately 0 ℃, 32 ℉ and
when drive-ready state is switched on.
▷
▷
▷
"Air recirculation"
"Fresh air"
"Auto air recirculation"
Turning maximum cooling on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Depending on the equipment, the air recircu-
lation function will turn off automatically after
some time depending on the environmental
factors to prevent condensation.
2. "MAX A/C"
The air flows from the air vents for the upper
body area. Open the vents.
Automatic rear air-conditioning system:
Press the key.
Amount of air
The LED in the button is illuminated
when maximum cooling is switched on.
General
The blower-generated air flow can be adjusted
individually as needed.
Air recirculation function
Adjusting the amount of air
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Principle
2.
Amount of air.
If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant
odour or contains pollutants, the supply of out-
side air into the interior of the vehicle can be
shut off. The interior air is then recirculated.
3. Select the desired setting.
The amount of air may be reduced in order to
save the vehicle battery power.
General
If there is condensation, switch off the air recir-
culation function.
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Adjusting the amount of air of
the automatic rear air-conditioning
system
SYNC programme
Principle
If the SYNC programme is activated, settings
on the driver's side are transferred to the pas-
senger's side and to the rear.
Via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
General
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Fan"
The following settings can be transferred:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
5. Select the desired setting.
Amount of air.
Using the button
Air distribution.
Automatic programme.
Press top or bottom side of button re-
peatedly: reduce or increase amount of
air.
Turning the SYNC programme
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The selected amount of air is shown on the
climate display.
2. "SYNC"
If the settings on the passenger side or in the
rear are changed, the programme is automati-
cally switched off.
Air distribution
General
In manual mode, the air distribution can be
adjusted as required.
Defrost function
Adjusting the air distribution
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windscreen and
the front side windows.
2.
Air distribution.
3. Select the desired setting.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
General
The amount of air and air temperature are
automatically optimised for the removal of ice
and condensation.
Adjusting the air distribution,
automatic rear air-conditioning
system
The air distribution is directed towards the
windscreen and the front side windows.
Press the upper or lower side of the
button. Select the desired setting.
If there is condensation, turn on the automatic
programme to utilise the advantages of the
condensation sensor. Ensure that air can flow
towards the windscreen.
The selected air distribution setting is
shown on the climate display.
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
When the defrost function is switched on, the
automatic rear air-conditioning system is de-
activated to provide maximum power.
If a drive is resumed within about 15 minutes
after a temporary stop, the functions are auto-
matically switched on at the last temperature
setting.
Turning the defrost function on/off
Turning the seat heating on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the
air conditioning bar.
Press the key.
The LED in the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
2.
Seat heating.
3. Select the desired setting.
Rear window heating
If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised
driving style is selected, the heater output is
reduced.
Principle
With the rear window heating, ice and conden-
sation are quickly removed from the rear win-
dow.
Turning the armrest heating on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
Operating requirements
Standby state or drive-ready state is switched
on.
3. Select the desired seat.
4. "Heat armrests and seat"
Switching the seat heating for the
rear automatic climate control on
Turning the rear window heating
on/off
Press the button once for each temper-
ature stage.
Press the key.
The LED is illuminated when the rear
window heating is switched on.
The highest temperature if the three
LEDs are illuminated.
The rear window heating switches off auto-
matically after a while.
Switching off the seat heating for
the rear automatic climate control
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs are extinguished.
Seat and armrest heating
Principle
The system heats the seats and armrests if
required.
Active seat ventilation
Principle
General
The system cools the seat and backrest surfa-
ces if required and ensures a pleasant seating
climate.
Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating if re-
quired.
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Switching the active seat ventilation
on/off
Ventilation at front
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the
air conditioning bar.
2.
Seat ventilation.
3. Select the desired setting.
If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised
driving style is selected, the cooling power is
reduced.
Setting the air flow direction and amount of air
at the air vent.
Steering wheel heating
▷
Changing the air flow direction: press the
button in the desired air flow direction.
Principle
▷
Changing the amount of air:
The system heats the steering wheel if neces-
sary.
▷
Turn the button clockwise to increase
the amount of air.
▷
Turn the button anti-clockwise to de-
crease the amount of air.
Turning the steering wheel heating
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the
air conditioning bar.
Ventilation in rear passenger
compartment
2.
Steering wheel heating.
3. Select the desired setting.
If a drive mode for a consumption-optimised
driving style is selected, the heater output is
reduced.
Ventilation
Principle
▷
▷
▷
Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrows 1.
The ventilation system provides individual
ranges of adjustment for direct or indirect ven-
tilation to optimise the movement of air inside
the vehicle.
Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and
closing the air vents, arrows 2.
Knurled wheel for varying the temperature,
arrow 3.
General
Towards blue: cooler.
Towards red: warmer.
Open the air vents and position them in a way
that ensures effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set temperature.
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Turn backwards: distribute the air in the
storage compartment between the seats.
Ventilation in the rear, side
The heating is not operational without switch-
ing on the blower. After the heating is switched
off, the blower can be used to recirculate the
interior air, for example at high temperatures.
To do this, switch on the blower, arrow 1, and
turn the knurled wheel towards the rear, ar-
row 2.
▷
▷
Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Air quality
Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and
closing the air vents, arrow 2.
General
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
Adjusting the ventilation
Depending on the set ventilation, align the air
flow directly or indirectly toward the passen-
gers.
▷
▷
▷
Emissions-tested interior.
Interior filter.
Climate control system for regulating tem-
perature, amount of air and air recirculation
function.
Heating and ventilation, third-row
seating
The air in the area of the third-row seating can
be heated or recirculated. The air vents are in
the storage compartments between the seats
and in the foot area of the third-row seating.
▷
▷
▷
Pre-cooling.
Physical Air Treatment Technology.
Fragrancing.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming outside
air or the circulated inside air in air recirculation
mode.
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen are filtered out from the
inflowing outside air.
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷
▷
Button for switching on the blower, arrow 1.
The LED is illuminated.
Microbial particles, viruses, and allergens
are filtered.
Knurled wheel for activating the heating
and distributing the air, arrow 2.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the interior filter replaced when the vehicle is
serviced.
Turn forwards: activate the heating and
distribute the air in the foot area.
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Ioniser
Ambient Air Package
Principle
Principle
The ioniser cleans the interior air by removing
suspended particles and improves the air qual-
ity.
With the Ambient Air Package, the interior air is
cleaned and perfumed with selected fragran-
ces.
Switching the ioniser on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
General
It is possible to choose between two fra-
grances in the vehicle. Additional fragrances
are possible by exchanging the fragrance car-
tridges.
3. "Air quality"
4. "Ionisation"
The following criteria can influence fragrance
perception inside the vehicle interior:
Fragrancing
▷
▷
▷
▷
Settings of the automatic air conditioning.
Temperature and air humidity.
Time of day and season.
General
Fragrancing is done at intervals to avoid famili-
arisation.
Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,
for example fatigue.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle enable
you to switch between fragrances.
BMW recommends using genuine BMW fra-
grance cartridges.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
refillable, and must be replaced by new fra-
grance cartridges after they are used up.
To ensure a pleasant interior fragrance in the
vehicle at the start of the journey, fragrancing
can be started before you set off. The system
is automatically switched on with pre-cooling if
fragrancing was switched on at the end of the
last journey.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating requirements
Refilled BMW fragrance cartridges may emit
harmful substances, and cause malfunctions
and damage to the system. There is a dan-
ger of injury or material damage. Do not refill
fragrance cartridges; once they are used up,
replace them with new fragrance cartridges.
▷
▷
▷
The fragrance cartridges are adequately fil-
led.
The interior temperature is between +5 ℃,
41 ℉ and +40 ℃, 104 ℉.
Open the ventilation air vents to allow the
fragrance to enter the passenger compart-
ment.
Selecting the fragrance
The interior is perfumed with the selected fra-
grance.
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
It is possible to choose between two fragran-
ces.
The cartridge holder slides downwards.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Air quality"
4. "Fragrance"
5. Select the desired fragrance.
Switching fragrancing on/off, setting
the intensity
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance
cartridge. Grip the top of the cover to slide it
off the fragrance cartridge.
2. "Settings"
3. "Air quality"
4. "Fragrance"
5. "Intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Display
Illustrations on the control display show the
current filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
4. Attach the removed cover to the rear side
of the fragrance cartridge.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Air quality"
When an empty fragrance cartridge is dis-
played, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry-
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
A Check Control message is displayed once
when the fragrance cartridges have been used
up.
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Glove compartment on the passenger's
2. Press the underside of the cartridge
bracket.
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
5. Position the fragrance cartridge so the chip
points away from the cartridge bracket.
The cartridge holder slides downwards.
3. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of
the bracket.
6. Slide the fragrance cartridge into the car-
tridge holder at a slight angle without ap-
plying pressure. The fragrance cartridge
is correctly positioned when the cartridge
holder can be closed.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
displayed on the control display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra-
grance displayed on the control display.
7. Push the cartridge holder upwards until it
engages.
4. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of
the bracket.
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from underneath, oth-
erwise the function of the Ambient Air
Package could be impaired.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Recycling
Glove compartment on the passenger's
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
handed over for recycling at an author-
ised Service Partner or another quali-
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
2. Press the underside of the cartridge
bracket.
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Pre-cooling/pre-heating
WARNING
When the pre-heating is operating, high tem-
peratures can be generated under the body,
for example because of the exhaust system.
If flammable materials come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system, these mate-
rials may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
sure that no flammable materials, for exam-
ple leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or other
flammable objects, can come into contact
with vehicle parts when the pre-heating is
operating. Switch off the pre-heating before
refuelling.
Principle
The system consists of the pre-cooling and
pre-heating functions. It allows the tempera-
ture of the interior to be adjusted before the
journey starts. The interior is ventilated or
heated depending on the set temperature and
ambient temperature. When doing so, the sys-
tem uses any available residual heat from the
engine or the vehicle's fuel for generating heat.
General
The system can be switched on and off directly
or for a preselected departure time.
Operating requirements
The switch-on time is calculated based on the
outside temperature. The system will switch
on in good time before the preselected depar-
ture time.
▷
The vehicle is in rest state or standby state.
▷
The vehicle battery must be sufficiently
charged.
The system switches off automatically after a
while. It continues to run for a short time after it
has been switched off.
When activated, the pre-cooling/pre-heat-
ing uses power from the vehicle battery. As
a result, the maximum operating time is re-
stricted to protect the vehicle battery. After
the engine is started or after driving a short
distance, the system will be available again.
If outside temperatures are below 0 ℃, 32 ℉,
water vapour condenses and exits underneath
the vehicle.
▷
For pre-heating: the fuel tank capacity is
sufficient.
Safety information
If the fuel tank capacity is low and the ve-
hicle is parked on a slant, the pre-heating
function may be restricted.
DANGER
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-
tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to
enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain
pollutants which are colourless and odour-
less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can
also build up outside the vehicle. There is
a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe
clear and ensure sufficient ventilation. Do
not switch on the pre-heating in enclosed
spaces, for example closed garages.
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.
The air vents of the ventilation are open.
Turning the pre-cooling/pre-heating
on/off
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-heating/cooling"
4. Select the desired setting.
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
Departure time
Display
Icon
Description
General
To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in
the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-
sible to set different departure times.
Icon in the upper centre
console.
Icon illuminates: the pre-
heating is switched on.
▷
One-off departure time: the time can be set.
The system is activated once.
Icon flashes: the residual
heat of the engine is being
used.
▷
Departure time with day of the week: the
time and day of the week can be set.
The system is switched on before the set
departure time on the required days of the
week.
Icon in the upper centre
console.
Icon is illuminated: a de-
parture time is activated.
Preselection of departure time is done in two
stages:
Icon flashes: the pre-cool-
ing/pre-heating is switched
on.
▷
▷
Set the departure times.
Activate the departure time.
At least 10 minutes should pass between
setting/activating the departure time and the
scheduled departure time, so the climate con-
trol has enough time to work.
Activating with the My BMW App
Depending on the equipment, the My BMW
App with remote function can be used to
switch on the pre-cooling/heating via a prese-
lected departure time or directly.
Setting the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
Pre-conditioning via Remote
Engine Start
3. "Pre-heating/cooling"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the required departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select the day of the week if necessary.
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or warms the interior to
a comfortable temperature before the start of
a journey. The system does this by automati-
cally cooling, ventilating or heating depending
on the internal, external and set desired tem-
perature. Any snow and ice can be removed
more easily.
Activating the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-heating/cooling"
4. "Departure plan"
The system starts the engine automatically for
this purpose and lets it run for a limited time.
5. Activate the required departure time.
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
gine to switch on automatically in order to con-
trol the interior climate.
Safety information
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
DANGER
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-
tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to
pollute the area around the vehicle or enter it.
The exhaust fumes contain pollutants which
are colourless and odourless. In enclosed
spaces or spaces with inadequate ventilation,
the exhaust fumes can also build up outside
the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe clear and ensure sufficient ven-
tilation. Do not switch on the pre-conditioning
in enclosed or poorly ventilated spaces, for
example closed garages.
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate cont."
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
General
For safety reasons, the system switches off
automatically after 15 minutes at the latest.
The system can be switched on a maximum of
twice in succession.
WARNING
When the pre-conditioning is operating, high
temperatures can be generated under the
body, for example because of the exhaust
system. If flammable materials come into
contact with hot parts of the exhaust system,
these materials may ignite. There is a risk
of fire. Make sure that no flammable materi-
als, for example leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil
or other flammable objects, can come into
contact with vehicle parts when the pre-con-
ditioning is operating.
The system will be available again once the
drive-ready state has been activated and de-
activated again.
Switching on via iDrive
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
Switching on/off using the vehicle key
Operating requirements
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in rest state or standby state.
Battery must be sufficiently charged.
Fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
Bonnet is closed.
Press the vehicle key button three
times within 1 second.
After the vehicle key is pressed, it will
take around 3 seconds for the engine to switch
on.
Ensure that the date and time are set cor-
rectly in the vehicle.
To switch the system off, press the button
again three times.
▷
Ventilation air vents are open.
Enabling automatic engine start
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. This enables the en-
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Air conditioning
CONTROLS
4. "Departure plan"
Switching off using the Start/Stop
button
5. Set the departure time.
The system can be switched off directly by
pressing the Start/Stop button without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
6. Select the day of the week if necessary.
Activating the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
Air conditioning for departure time
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
General
4. "Departure plan"
To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in
the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-
sible to set scheduled departure times in the
system.
5. Activate the required departure time.
Display
▷
One-off departure time: the scheduled de-
parture time can be set.
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
The system is switched on as a one-off.
▷
Departure time with day of the week: the
scheduled departure time and day of the
week can be set.
Icon
Description
Preselection of departure time is done in two
stages:
Icon in the upper centre
console.
▷
▷
Set the departure times.
Activate the departure time.
Icon is illuminated: a de-
parture time is activated.
The system is automatically activated a few
minutes before the set departure time. The
system remains switched on until just after the
set departure time.
Icon flashes: the pre-condi-
tioning is turned on.
For safety reasons, climate control for depar-
ture time is only possible once.
Vehicle acknowledgement signals
The system switch-on is acknowledged by two
flashes.
The system will be available again once the
drive-ready state has been activated and de-
activated again.
The side lights remain switched on while the
system is switched on.
Observe the information regarding the inten-
ded use of the vehicle.
For further information:
Your own safety, see page 9.
Setting the departure time
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
General
Vehicle equipment
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 V.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
WARNING
Devices and cables, for example portable
navigation devices, that are located in the de-
ployment range of the airbags may impede
airbag deployment or be thrown around the
vehicle interior when the airbag is deployed.
There is a danger of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the deployment
range of the airbags.
Sun visor
Glare protection
Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards.
Protection from glare at the side
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold down the sun visor.
WARNING
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
electrical system. There is a danger of injury
or material damage. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
2. Detach the sun visor from its holder and
pivot it sideways to the side window.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding the sun visor in
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse or-
der.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the
sun visor.
WARNING
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a danger
of injury or material damage. After using the
socket, re-fit the cigarette lighter or socket
cover.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Front centre console
Inside the luggage compartment
Press the cover.
There is a socket on the right side of the lug-
gage compartment. Open the cover.
USB port
General
Please comply with the notes on connecting
mobile devices to the USB port in the chapter
on USB connections.
A socket is located between the cup holders, in
one of the marked positions. Pull off the cover.
For further information:
For information on USB connection, see Own-
er’s Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication.
Rear centre console
In the centre armrest
There is a socket in the centre console.
Pull off the cover.
There is a USB port in the centre armrest.
Properties:
▷
▷
▷
USB port type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: max. 3 A.
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
In the centre console
BMW Travel & Comfort
System
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, for ex-
ample large USB connectors, can block or
damage the cover on opening and closing.
There is a risk of material damage. When
opening and closing, make sure that the
movement range of the cover is kept clear.
General
USB connections and mounts for mounting
optional accessories, e.g. universal holders for
tablets or clothes hangers are located on the
backrests of the front seats.
USB port properties:
▷
▷
▷
USB port type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per
seat.
Additional information is available from an au-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Overview
Press the cover.
The sockets and the USB ports are located
behind the marked covers.
A USB port is located in the centre console, in
one of the marked positions.
Properties:
▷
▷
USB port type A.
For charging mobile devices and transfer-
ring data.
▷
Charge current: maximum 1.5 A.
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
sure there are no objects in the tray together
with the device.
Installing optional accessories
1. Slide the cover all the way to the side.
Overview
Tray crosswise in the centre console:
2. Fit optional accessories, see installation in-
structions.
1
LED
Wireless charging tray
2
Dock surface
Principle
Tray on the left in the centre console:
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects in the wireless
charging tray together with the device to be
charged.
The charging process is indicated by the
charge indicator on the control display.
1
LED
2
Dock surface
Safety information
Operating requirements
▷
The device to be charged must have been
certified according to the Qi standard.
WARNING
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects that
are in the tray together with the device can
become very hot. If storage media or elec-
tronic cards, for example, smart cards, cards
with magnetic strips or cards for transmitting
signals, are located in the tray together with
the device, their function may be impaired.
There is a danger of injury or material dam-
age. When charging mobile devices, make
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
The maximum size for a mobile phone is
approximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x
3.1 x 0.7 in.
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
Enabling/disabling the forgotten
warning
The mobile phone to be charged is located
in the middle of the dock. The display of the
mobile phone faces upwards.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open the cover of the dock.
2. Place the mobile phone in the centre of the
dock with the display facing upwards.
System limits
The charging current may be reduced or
charging may be temporarily interrupted in the
wireless charging tray in the following situa-
tions:
3. Close the cover of the dock.
LED displays
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures of the tray
and mobile phone.
Col-
our
Meaning
When there are objects between the mobile
phone and wireless charging tray.
Blue
The mobile phone is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted Qi-compatible mobile
phone is fully charged.
If storage media or electronic cards, for
example, chip cards, cards with magnetic
strips or cards for signal transmission, are
located between the mobile phone and the
wireless charging tray.
Or-
ange
The mobile phone is not charging.
The mobile phone may be exposed
to excessively high temperature or
there may be foreign bodies in the
charging cradle.
▷
▷
By protective sleeves and covers that ex-
ceed a thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in.
By protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g. with magnetic
parts.
Red
The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact an authorised Service Part-
ner or another qualified Service Part-
ner or a specialist workshop.
▷
▷
By add-on parts on the mobile phone, e.g.
holders.
By settings on the mobile phone, for ex-
ample for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
Forgotten phone warning
General
A warning can be issued if a mobile phone with
Qi certification has been left in the wireless
charging tray when exiting the vehicle.
The forgotten phone warning is shown in the
instrument cluster.
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
The glove compartment protrudes into the
interior when it is open. Objects in the glove
compartment may be thrown into the interior
during the journey, for example in the event
of an accident or when braking or taking
avoidance manoeuvre. There is a danger of
injury. Immediately close the glove compart-
ment after using it.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
be thrown around the interior while driving,
e.g. in the event of an accident, or when
braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.
There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose
objects.
Opening the glove compartment
WARNING
Pull the handle.
Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument
panel. Attached objects can become de-
tached. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Do not use anti-slip mats.
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be handed over without the
integrated key, for example, if the car is being
parked by a valet parking service.
For further information:
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Safety information
Fold-down compartment
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
Breakable objects, for example glass bottles
or glasses, may get broken in the event of an
accident or when braking or taking avoidance
manoeuvre. Splinters may scatter throughout
the interior. There is a danger of injury or ma-
terial damage. Do not use breakable objects
during a journey. Only stow breakable objects
in closed storage compartments.
The fold-down compartment protrudes into
the interior when open. Objects in the fold-
down compartment may be thrown into the
interior while driving, for example in the event
of an accident or when braking or performing
avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of
injury. Immediately close the fold-down com-
partment after use.
Storage compartments in
the centre console
Opening the fold-down
compartment
Opening the storage compartment
Press the button and open the cover.
Press the cover.
Storage compartments in
the doors
Closing the storage compartment
Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.
General
Front centre armrest
There are storage compartments in the doors.
General
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the seats.
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening the centre armrest
Opening the centre armrest
Press the key.
Press the button, arrow 1, and open up the
cover, arrow 2.
Close the centre armrest
Press both lids down until they engage.
Close the centre armrest
Press the cover down until it engages.
Centre armrest rear
Cup holder front
Safety information
WARNING
General
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the seats.
Folding down the centre armrest
Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold-
ers may damage the cup holders or be flung
into the interior, for example in the event of
an accident or when braking or taking avoid-
ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the
driver from the traffic situation and lead to
an accident. Hot beverages may damage the
cup holders or cause scalding. There is a
danger of injury or material damage. Do not
force objects into the cup holder. Use light-
weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.
Do not transport hot drinks.
Fold the centre armrest forwards.
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening the cup holder
NOTICE
When the thermal cup holder is switched
on and the cover is closed, the thermal cup
holder may overheat. There is a risk of ma-
terial damage. Switch off the thermal cup
holder before closing the cover.
NOTICE
Press the cover.
Temperature-sensitive objects can be dam-
aged by the hot metal insert in the thermal
cup holder. There is a risk of material dam-
age. Only use suitable containers.
Switching on the thermal cup holder
Press the corresponding button once to
keep cold or hot.
▷
▷
Blue LED illuminates: keep beverages cold.
Red LED illuminates: keep beverages hot.
There are two cup holders in the centre con-
sole.
Switching off the thermal cup holder
Closing the cup holder
Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.
Press the button repeatedly until the
LEDs extinguish.
Maintaining beverage temperature
Cup holder rear
Safety information
WARNING
General
Depending on the equipment, drinks can be
kept warm or cool.
Safety information
Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold-
ers may damage the cup holders or be flung
into the interior, for example in the event of
an accident or when braking or taking avoid-
ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the
driver from the traffic situation and lead to
an accident. Hot beverages may damage the
cup holders or cause scalding. There is a
danger of injury or material damage. Do not
WARNING
Contact with the hot metal insert in the ther-
mal cup holder may cause burns. There is
a danger of injury. Do not touch the metal in-
sert when the thermal cup holder is switched
on.
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
force objects into the cup holder. Use light-
weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.
Do not transport hot drinks.
Third-row seating
NOTICE
If the cup holder is open, the centre armrest
cannot be folded back. There is a risk of ma-
terial damage. Press back the covers before
folding up the centre armrest.
The cup holders are between the seats in the
third-row seating.
Second-row seating
General
Coat hooks
The cup holder can be adapted to fit three
sizes.
General
Opening the cup holder
1. Fold down the centre armrest.
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles
and on the body pillar in the rear.
2. Press the button and fold out the cup
holder fully.
Safety information
WARNING
Items of clothing on the coat hooks can im-
pair visibility when driving. There is a risk
of accident. Hang items of clothing from the
coat hooks in such a way that they do not
obstruct visibility when driving.
WARNING
Downsizing the cup holder
Incorrect use of the coat hooks can present
a danger, for example if objects are thrown
around as a result of braking or avoidance
manoeuvres. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Only hang lightweight ob-
jects, for example items of clothing, on the
coat hooks.
To make it smaller, the cup holder can be fol-
ded in 2 steps.
Enlarging the cup holder
To enlarge a reduced cup holder again, first
fold it in completely. Then fold the cup holder
out again fully.
Closing the cup holder
Fold in the cup holder fully until it engages.
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
Luggage compartment
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
be thrown around the interior while driving,
e.g. in the event of an accident, or when
braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.
There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose
objects.
This chapter describes equipment, systems
and functions which are offered or may be of-
fered in future on a model-specific basis, even
if they are not included in the vehicle in ques-
tion.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 8.
Loading
WARNING
Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be
thrown into the interior, for example in the
event of an accident or when braking or tak-
ing avoidance manoeuvre. Vehicle occupants
could be struck and injured. There is a dan-
ger of injury. Stow and secure objects and the
load correctly.
Safety information
WARNING
A high total weight can make the tyres over-
heat, causing internal damage and a sudden
tyre pressure loss. Handling characteristics
may be adversely affected, for example re-
duced directional stability, longer stopping
distance and altered steering characteristics.
There is a risk of accident. Please comply
with the permitted load index of the tyre, and
do not exceed the permitted total weight.
NOTICE
Liquids in the luggage compartment may
cause damage. There is a risk of material
damage. Ensure that no liquids leak out into
the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Stowing and securing loads in the
vehicle
If the permitted total weight and the permit-
ted axle loads are exceeded, the operational
safety of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed
the permitted total weight and permitted axle
loads.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Wrap protective material around any sharp
corners and edges on the load.
Do not stack loads above the upper edge of
the backrests.
Fully fold down the rear seat backrests if
stowing a large load.
Secure load-securing equipment to the
lashing eyes in the luggage compartment.
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Use the luggage compartment partition net
to protect the vehicle passengers depend-
ing on the equipment. Make sure that ob-
jects cannot penetrate the luggage com-
partment partition net.
The front lashing eyes are located under cov-
ers.
Automated slide & anti-slip
rails
Small and lightweight load: secure with ten-
sioning straps or retaining straps or with a
luggage compartment net.
Principle
▷
▷
Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing
straps.
Heavy loads: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, low down and directly behind the rear
seat backrests.
▷
Very heavy loads: stow as far forward as
possible, low down and directly behind the
rear seat backrests. If there are no passen-
gers on the rear seat, insert both outer seat
belts into the respective opposite buckles.
The system prevents the load from sliding
around in the luggage compartment when the
anti-slip rails are up.
Lashing eyes in the luggage
compartment
General
General
Observe the information and notes about load-
ing.
Load-securing equipment, for example lashing
straps, tensioning straps, retaining straps or
luggage compartment nets, must be secured
to the lashing eyes.
The anti-slip rails come up automatically
whenever:
▷
▷
Tailgate is closed.
Incline of the vehicle is more than approx.
13 %.
Overview
▷
Tailgate is open and a speed of
around 5 km/h, 3 mph is exceeded.
For further information:
Multifunction hook
General
The lashing eyes are located in the luggage
compartment.
There is a multifunction hook on the left and
right side in the luggage compartment.
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
Safety information
Opening the storage compartment
WARNING
Incorrect use of the multifunction hook may
present a danger, for example if objects are
flung around when performing braking and
avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of
injury or material damage. Only hang light-
weight objects from the multifunction hooks.
Only transport heavy luggage in the luggage
compartment if suitably secured.
Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,
arrow 2.
Folding down the multifunction
hook
Luggage compartment floor
General
There are storage compartments underneath
the luggage compartment floor.
Opening the storage compartment
Press on the multifunction hook and turn it un-
til it engages.
Net
Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on
the left-hand or right-hand side.
Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
Side storage compartment,
left
Enlarging the luggage
compartment
General
Principle
There is a storage compartment on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
The luggage compartment can be enlarged by
folding down the rear seat backrests.
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
the seats and their backrests are correctly
General
engaged or locked. If possible and if neces-
sary, adjust the height of the head restraints
or remove them.
The rear seat backrest of the second row of
seats is split 40–20–40. The rear seat backr-
ests on each side and the centre section can
be folded down individually.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear or from the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
When folding down the rear seat backrest,
vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts
can become trapped. There is a danger of in-
jury or material damage. When folding down,
make sure that the movement range of the
rear seat backrest, including the head re-
straint, is kept clear.
Depending on the equipment, the rear seat
backrests can be folded down manually or
electrically.
Safety information
WARNING
Folding down the rear seat backrest
manually
Risk of entrapment when folding down the
rear seat backrest. There is a danger of injury
or material damage. Before folding down,
make sure that the movement range of the
rear seat backrest and the head restraint is
clear.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured load may be flung into the interior,
for example in the event of an accident or
when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-
vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure
that the rear seat backrest is locked after it
has been folded back.
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest
forwards.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
manually
Fold back the rear seat backrest into the seat
position and engage.
WARNING
The red mark behind the lever disappears
completely.
If the seat is not set properly or the child
seat has been installed incorrectly, the child
restraint system may have restricted or no
stability at all. There is a danger of injury
or danger to life. Make sure that the child
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back-
rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and
adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
Folding down rear seat backrest
electrically
Folding down the centre section
From the rear
Fold down the centre armrest and pull on the
loop.
Pull the switch and fold the rear seat backrest
forwards.
Luggage compartment
cover
From the luggage compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
be thrown around the interior while driving,
e.g. in the event of an accident, or when
braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.
There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose
objects.
Pull switch in the luggage compartment.
▷
Top switch: the left and middle rear seat
backrest fold forwards.
▷
Bottom switch: the right rear seat backrest
folds forwards.
WARNING
If the luggage compartment cover springs
back quickly, it can trap parts of the body or
cause damage. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Do not allow the luggage
compartment cover to spring back quickly.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
electrically
From the rear
Press the relevant switch. The rear seat back-
rest moves to an upright position.
From the luggage compartment
Pull the relevant switch. The rear seat backrest
moves to an upright position.
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
WARNING
If the luggage compartment cover is not in-
serted correctly, it may be thrown around the
interior during the journey, for example in the
event of an accident or when braking or tak-
ing avoidance manoeuvre. There is a danger
of injury or material damage. Make sure that
the luggage compartment cover is engaged
securely in the brackets.
Press the release key, arrow 1, and pull the
luggage compartment cover out towards the
rear, arrow 2.
Closing the luggage compartment
cover
Stowing the luggage compartment
cover
General
The luggage compartment cover can be
stowed in the storage compartment under the
luggage compartment floor.
To stow the luggage compartment cover and
the luggage compartment partition net to-
gether, the luggage compartment partition net
must be stowed in the rear position first.
Pull out the luggage compartment cover, ar-
row 1, and attach it to the brackets on both
sides, arrow 2.
Without a third-row seating
1. Open the side storage compartment on the
left.
Removing the luggage
compartment cover
2. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
The cover can be removed for stowing bulky
items.
3. Turn the luggage compartment cover so its
handle faces the front.
4. Set down the left side of the luggage com-
partment cover and lower the right side.
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
Make sure that the luggage compartment
cover is positioned correctly in the right-
hand bracket.
sure that the cover audibly engages on both
sides.
Electric luggage
compartment cover
Principle
The electric luggage compartment cover opens
and closes automatically with the tailgate. For
stowing bulky items or luggage, the luggage
compartment cover can be lowered under the
luggage compartment floor.
5. Press the luggage compartment floor down
and close the side storage compartment on
the left.
General
Objects in the movement range are detected.
The luggage compartment cover stops auto-
matically to prevent damage.
With a third-row seating
1. Open the side storage compartment on the
left.
2. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
Safety information
3. Set down the left side of the luggage com-
partment cover and lower the right side.
WARNING
Make sure that the luggage compartment
cover is positioned correctly in the right-
hand bracket.
Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
be thrown around the interior while driving,
e.g. in the event of an accident, or when
braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.
There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose
objects.
WARNING
Parts of the body may be trapped by the
electric luggage compartment cover. The lug-
gage compartment cover may be damaged
by objects in the movement range. There is a
danger of injury or material damage. When
opening and closing, make sure that the
movement range of the electric luggage com-
partment cover is kept clear. When lowering,
also make sure that the movement range of
4. Press the luggage compartment floor down
and close the side storage compartment on
the left.
Inserting the luggage compartment
cover
Hold the cover horizontally and slide it for-
wards and into the two side holders. Make
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
the cover flap in the luggage compartment
floor is kept clear.
Buttons in the vehicle
NOTICE
Objects on the cover can cause damage.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
place any objects on the luggage compart-
ment cover.
The luggage compartment cover buttons are
located on the left-hand side of the luggage
compartment.
NOTICE
Operating the electric luggage compartment
cover by hand can damage the cover. There
is a risk of material damage. Use the buttons
in the luggage compartment for operation.
Switch between automatic and base
position.
Lower or raise the luggage compart-
ment cover.
Overview
Luggage compartment cover positions
Opening the luggage compartment
cover
When the tailgate is opened, the luggage com-
partment cover is opened as far as the auto-
matic position.
To open the luggage compartment cover all
the way to the base position:
Press the key.
▷
▷
Automatic position, arrow 1.
Base position, arrow 2.
Closing the luggage compartment
cover
Press the key.
The luggage compartment cover is closed as
far as the automatic position.
When closing the tailgate, the luggage com-
partment cover is closed completely.
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
The luggage compartment cover is not closed
automatically if it is in the base position when
closing the tailgate.
To restore functionality, close the luggage
compartment cover by hand, arrow 1, until it
engages in the mount, arrow 2.
▷
▷
An ambient temperature that is too high
or too low can cause the luggage com-
partment cover to switch off. The function
will be restored when the temperature is
brought back to within the normal range,
for example by switching on the air condi-
tioning.
Lowering the luggage compartment
cover
The luggage compartment cover can be low-
ered for stowing bulky luggage.
Press the key.
If the system can no longer detect the posi-
tion of the luggage compartment cover, the
function will be deactivated. Initialisation is
required.
The luggage compartment cover is lowered
under the luggage compartment floor.
Raising the luggage compartment
cover
Initialising
▷
Press the key.
Operating requirements
The luggage compartment cover is
raised to the base position.
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle is standing on level ground.
Drive-ready state is activated.
▷
Press the key.
The movement range of the luggage com-
partment cover is kept clear.
The luggage compartment cover
is raised to the base position and
closes as far as the automatic position.
▷
Outside temperature is above 5 ℃, 41 ℉.
Initialising the system
Press and hold the button until initiali-
Malfunctions
▷
If the closing force exceeds a certain level
when closing the luggage compartment
cover, for example due to objects in the
movement range, the cover will disengage
from the mount. The luggage compartment
cover comes to a stop in the guide rail.
sation is complete.
The luggage compartment cover moves to var-
ious positions. Initialisation is complete when a
signal sounds.
If the button is released too soon, the lug-
gage compartment cover stops. Initialisation
has been cancelled.
Press and hold the button to restart the initiali-
sation.
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
With the rear seat backrest upright
1. Remove or lower the luggage compartment
cover.
Luggage compartment
partition net
2. Fold up the rear cover caps on the roof
frame at the top until they lock into place.
General
The luggage compartment partition net can be
installed in two different positions in the vehi-
cle.
With the rear seat backrest folded
down
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests.
To enlarge the luggage compartment, see
3. Insert both upper fastening pins of the lug-
gage compartment partition net into the
holders as far as they will go, arrow 1, and
slide forwards.
2. Fold up the front cover caps on the roof
frame at the top until they lock into place.
3. Insert both upper fastening pins of the lug-
gage compartment partition net into the
holders as far as they will go, arrow 1, and
slide forwards.
4. Hook the two lower hooks of the luggage
compartment partition net into the two eyes
on the rear seat backrest, arrows 2.
Stowing the partition net
General
The luggage compartment partition net can be
stowed under the luggage compartment floor.
To stow the luggage compartment cover and
the luggage compartment partition net to-
gether, the luggage compartment partition net
must be stowed in the rear position first.
4. Hook the two lower hooks of the luggage
compartment partition net into the two eyes
on the folded-down rear seat backrest, ar-
rows 2. The rear seat backrests may need
to be raised a little to do this.
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
Luggage compartment
CONTROLS
5. Store the luggage compartment partition
net in the recess. The mounting points
must point downwards.
Without a third-row seating
1. Remove the luggage compartment partition
net.
2. Roll up the luggage compartment partition
net and fasten with the Velcro strap.
3. Remove the trim panel on the left-hand
side.
4. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
5. Store the luggage compartment partition
net in the recess. The mounting points
must point downwards.
6. Lower one retaining strap to the left, ar-
row 1, and lay the second retaining strap
in the recess towards the front, arrow 2.
6. Press the luggage compartment floor
downwards.
7. Insert the trim on the left-hand side.
7. Press the luggage compartment floor
downwards.
8. Insert the trim on the left-hand side.
With a third-row seating
1. Remove the luggage compartment partition
net.
2. Roll up the luggage compartment partition
net and fasten with the Velcro strap.
3. Remove the trim panel on the left-hand
side
4. Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A7D5D0 - II/23
